Volvo C30 Owner's manual

Volvo C30 Owner's manual
C30
Owners Manual
L:7:9>I>DC
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.
The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your
passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo
has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that
you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 01 02
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 8
Volvo and the environment....................... 12
Seatbelts...................................................
Airbag system...........................................
Airbags......................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*...........
Side airbags (SIPS bags)..........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................
WHIPS.......................................................
When the systems deploy.........................
Crash mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
02 Instruments and controls
16
19
20
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
Overview, left-hand drive cars..................
Overview, right-hand drive cars................
Driver's door control panel.......................
Combined instrument panel......................
Indicator and warning symbols.................
Information display...................................
Electrical socket........................................
Lighting panel...........................................
Left-hand stalk switch...............................
Right-hand stalk switch............................
Cruise control*..........................................
Keypad in the steering wheel*..................
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers................................................
Parking brake............................................
Power windows.........................................
Windows, rearview and door mirrors........
Power sunroof*.........................................
Personal preferences................................
42
44
46
47
48
52
54
56
61
64
67
69
70
71
72
74
78
80
HomeLinkŸ *.............................................. 83
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
03 04 05
03 Climate control
04 Interior
General information on climate control..... 88
Manual climate control, AC....................... 90
Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 93
Air distribution........................................... 96
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*.................... 97
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....... 100
Front seats..............................................
Interior lighting........................................
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment..................................................
Rear seat.................................................
Cargo area..............................................
05 Locks and alarm
104
109
112
116
118
Remote control key with key blade.........
Active locks.............................................
Keyless drive*..........................................
Battery in remote control key..................
Locking and unlocking............................
Alarm*.....................................................
124
127
128
131
132
135
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
06 07 08
4
06 Starting and driving
07 Wheels and tyres
General.................................................... 140
Refuelling................................................ 142
Alcolock*................................................. 146
Starting the engine.................................. 150
Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 152
Keyless drive*.......................................... 154
Manual gearbox...................................... 155
Automatic gearbox.................................. 156
DRIVe Start-Stop*................................... 161
Brake system.......................................... 165
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*......................................................... 167
Park Assist*............................................. 169
BLIS*....................................................... 171
Towing and recovery.............................. 174
Start assistance...................................... 178
Driving with a trailer................................ 179
Towing equipment*................................. 181
Detachable towbar* ............................... 183
Loading................................................... 187
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 188
General....................................................
Tyre pressure..........................................
Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ......
Changing wheels....................................
Emergency puncture repair*...................
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08 Car care
192
196
197
199
201
Cleaning.................................................. 208
Touching up paintwork........................... 212
Rustproofing........................................... 214
Table of contents
09 10 11
09 Maintenance and service
Volvo service...........................................
Self-maintenance....................................
Bonnet and engine compartment...........
Oils and fluids.........................................
Wiper blades...........................................
Battery.....................................................
Replacing bulbs......................................
Fuses......................................................
10 Infotainment system
218
219
220
222
228
230
234
240
General....................................................
Audio functions.......................................
Radio functions.......................................
CD functions...........................................
Menu structure – audio system..............
Phone functions*.....................................
Menu structure – phone*.........................
Bluetooth handsfree*..............................
11 Specifications
250
252
257
262
265
266
273
276
Type designation.....................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ........................................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
Symbols in the display............................
284
286
289
290
292
295
298
300
302
303
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
5
Table of contents
12
12 Alphabetical Index
Alphabetical Index.................................. 306
6
Table of contents
7
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey. This will give you the opportunity
to familiarise yourself with new functions, to
see how best to handle the car in different situations, and to make the best use of all the
car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding.
We reserve the right to make modifications
without prior notice.
©
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual
also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra
equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations
for the needs of different markets and national
or local laws and regulations.
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information
in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the
car have the following descending degree of
importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of features and functions for example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
page. This information is an addition to the text
that it refers to via a number. If the footnote
refers to text in a table then letters are used
instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show text
messages. These text messages are high-
8
Decals
NOTE
Volvo Car Corporation
Option
lighted in the owner's manual by means of the
text being slightly larger and printed in grey.
Examples of this are in menu texts and message texts on the information display (e.g.
AUDIO SETTINGS).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field. Used
to indicate the presence of danger which, if the
Introduction
Important information
warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the owner's
manual.
Risk of property damage
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
G031592
G031593
There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the
order of the instructions is not significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which,
if the warning is ignored, may result in damage
to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
9
Introduction
Important information
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
• Coolant
• Engine oil
To be continued
`` This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when a section continues on the following
page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record information during normal driving if they detect an
error. In addition, information is recorded in the
event of a collision or incident. Parts of the
recorded information are required so that technicians can diagnose and rectify faults in the
vehicle during servicing and maintenance and
so that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements and
other regulations. In addition to this, the information is used for research purposes by Volvo
in order to continually develop quality and
safety, as the information can contribute to a
better understanding of the factors that cause
accidents and injuries. The information
10
includes details of the status and functionality
of various systems and modules in the vehicle
with regard to engine, throttle, steering and
brake systems, amongst other things. This
information may include details regarding the
way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a result
of a collision or incident. This information may
be stored by Volvo as long as it can help to
further develop and further enhance safety and
quality and as long as there are legal requirements and other regulations that Volvo needs
to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties
without the vehicle owner's consent. However,
due to national legislation and regulations
Volvo may be required to disclose such information to authorities such as police authorities,
or others who may assert a legal right to have
access to it.
To be able to read and interpret the information
recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a secure
manner and that the handling complies with
applicable legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. We
therefore recommend that you always contact
an authorised Volvo workshop before installing
accessories which are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call *
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort services. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is a
change of owner, it is very important that these
services are discontinued so that the former
owner cannot access the services in the car.
Contact the call centre by pressing the ON
CALL button in the car or contact an authorised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing the
security code" in the owner's manual for Volvo
On Call.
Introduction
Important information
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
code, which is available as a supplemental program for several mobile phones. The QR code
reader can be downloaded from App Store or
Android Market.
QR code
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all operations. We also believe that our customers share
our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most resourceefficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corporation has global ISO certification, which
includes the environmental standard ISO
14001 covering all factories and several of our
other units. We also set requirements for our
partners so that they work systematically with
environmental issues.
12
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption
in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel
consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read under the
heading, Reducing environmental impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that
encompasses a clean interior environment as
well as highly efficient emission control. In
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
many cases the exhaust emissions are well
below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase in
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone
and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon
filter.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption
for your car. In this way you contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of our system. We make clear demands regarding the
way in which our workshops are designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. Our workshop staff have the
knowledge and the tools required to guarantee
good environmental care.
Reducing environmental impact
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
• Drive economically - think ahead.
• Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
• If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces
wear in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which lowers consumption and
reduces emissions.
• High speed increases consumption con-
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship CouncilŸ symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSCŸ certified forests or other
controlled sources.
siderably due to increased wind resistance
- a doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.
• Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a
workshop in the event of uncertainty about
how this type of waste should be discarded
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 140 and
295.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
13
Seatbelts.................................................................................................
Airbag system.........................................................................................
Airbags....................................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*.........................................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC)..............................................................................
WHIPS.....................................................................................................
When the systems deploy.......................................................................
Crash mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
14
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
16
19
20
22
24
26
27
29
30
31
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
General information
Releasing the seatbelt
–
Press the red lock button and then let the
seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
G020104
• if it is pulled out too quickly
• during braking and acceleration
• if the car leans heavily.
• do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be positioned low down.
•
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all
passengers use their seatbelts. It is important
that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can
provide maximum protection. Do not lean the
backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed
to protect in a normal seating position.
• the hip strap must be positioned low down
Putting on a seatbelt
–
16
Keep in mind the following
Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by
pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud
"click" indicates that the seatbelt has
locked.
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt
has been subjected to a major load, such as
in conjunction with a collision, the entire
seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the
seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not
appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be
replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and designed for installation at
the same location as the replaced seatbelt.
(not over the abdomen)
• tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
WARNING
The rear seat is designed for a maximum of
two passengers.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
Seatbelts and pregnancy
such that they can easily maintain control of the
vehicle as they drive (which means that they
must be able to easily operate the foot pedals
and steering wheel). They should strive to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their abdomen and the steering
wheel.
G020105
As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
should adjust their seats and steering wheel
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
• Provides information on which seatbelts
• Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during a journey. This
warning takes the form of a message on
the information display along with the
audio/visual signal. The warning ceases
when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when
acknowledged manually by pressing the
READ button.
G018084
The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat
over the thighs and as low as possible under
the abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride
upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt
and ensure that it fits as close to the body as
possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
are being used in the rear seat. A message
is shown in the information display when
the seatbelts are used. The message is
cleared automatically after driving for
approximately 30 seconds or after pressing the indicator stalk's READ button.
Seatbelt reminder
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way. The diagonal section of the seatbelt should wrap over the shoulder then be
routed between the breasts and to the side of
the abdomen.
01
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual
reminder. The audio reminder is speed
dependent, and in some cases time dependent. The visual reminder is located in the roof
console and the combined instrument panel.
The message on the information display showing which seatbelts are in use is always available. Press the READ button to see stored
messages.
Certain markets
An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At
low speed, the audio reminder will sound for
the first 6 seconds.
``
17
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Seatbelt tensioner
Seatbelt guide
All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for occupants.
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any
foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts
and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision.
There is a risk of serous injury.
G020106
WARNING
The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver's
seat and passenger seat.
The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing better
access to the seatbelt. When getting into and
out of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt from
the seatbelt guide and position it furthest back
on the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into the
seatbelt guide afterwards.
18
01 Safety
Airbag system
Warning symbol on the combined
instrument panel
01
As well as the warning symbol, a
message may appear on the display in appropriate cases. If the
warning symbol malfunctions, the
warning triangle illuminates and
the message SRS AIRBAG
SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS
AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT
appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
WARNING
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is turned to key position I, II or III. The
symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does
not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
19
01 Safety
01
Airbags
Airbag system
WARNING
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.
G020111
20
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The airbag system senses the force of
the collision on the car and adapts accordingly so that one or more airbags is
deployed.
The capacities of the airbags are also adapted to the collision force to which they are
subjected.
G020110
SRS system, left-hand drive
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To
cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when
compressed. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and
deflation of the airbag, takes place within
tenths of a second.
The sensors react differently depending on
the course of the collision and whether or
not the seatbelts on the driver's side and
passenger side are used.
SRS system, right-hand drive
01 Safety
Airbags
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's
side. It is folded up into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS
AIRBAG.
G020113
WARNING
Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive
and right-hand drive cars.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
instrument panel where the passenger airbag is located.
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by the
airbag in the event of a collision.
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated.1
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat. Children under
140 cm must never sit in the front passenger
seat if the airbag is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Passenger airbag
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. The cover panel is marked
SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and back
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
1
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
21
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can be
deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For
information on how to activate/deactivate, see
under the heading Activating/deactivating.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated and the symbol
in the roof
console is illuminated. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
WARNING
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open, (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required position. Volvo recommends that the key blade is
used to change position.
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the text message in the roof
console indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning symbol for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined instrument panel. This indicates that
there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo
recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
For information on the key blade, see
page 125.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
WARNING
If the car is equipped with a front passenger
airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS),
then the airbag will always be activated.
22
Activating/deactivating
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Switch location.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, children taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger seat
when the airbag is activated. This applies to
everyone shorter than 140 cm.
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
01
NOTE
When the remote control key is turned to
key position II or III the warning symbol for
the airbag is displayed on the combined
instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see
page 19.
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different key
positions, see page 150.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in
the front passenger seat when the airbag is
deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
G018083
Messages
2
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
G018082
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
23
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
Side airbag
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not place any objects in the area
between the outside of the seat and the
door panel, since this area is required
by the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
G020118
•
Side airbag locations.
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and are an important part of the
SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front
seat backrests.
1
24
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
A child seat or booster cushion can be placed
on the front passenger seat provided that the
car does not have an activated1 passenger airbag.
For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.
Location
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
01 Safety
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
01
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips
the sensors and the side airbags are inflated.
The airbag inflates between the occupant and
the door panel and thereby cushions the initial
impact. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. The side airbag is normally only
deployed on the side of the collision.
25
01 Safety
01
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a
part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the
headlining along both sides of the roof and
protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer
seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the
sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the
driver and passengers from striking their heads
on the inside of the car during a collision.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels.
This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends that you only
ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the side windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
26
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
G020347
Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints for the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to alter
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
Correct seating position
WARNING
WARNING
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
For the best possible protection, the driver and
front seat passenger should sit in the centre of
the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
27
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo
recommends that it is checked by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
G020125
G020126
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
28
Do not place objects in the rear seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the folded
backrest.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end
collision.
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
Activating the systems
A
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front seat
In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision
Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat
In a frontal collision
Airbags
In a frontal collisionA
Side airbags (SIPS)
In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC
In a side-impact accidentA
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end collision
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of
the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.
If the airbags have been deployed, the following is recommended:
• Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
• Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
• Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner systems are deployed only once during a collision.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags
may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The smoke
and dust created when the airbags are
deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/
injury after intensive exposure. In case of
irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid
deployment sequence and airbag fabric
may cause friction and skin burns.
29
01 Safety
01
Crash mode
Driving after a collision
Firstly, remove the remote control key and then
reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE
MANUAL is still shown on the display then the
car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car
appears to be driveable, hidden damage may
make the car impossible to control once moving.
G029042
Moving the car
If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH
MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on
the information display. This means that the car
has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a
protective state that is enforced when the collision may have damaged any of the car's vital
functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for
one of the safety systems, or the brake system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
30
can be moved carefully out of a dangerous
position. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
crash mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you always engage
an authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to NORMAL MODE after
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been
displayed.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is
displayed. Leave the car at once.
WARNING
If the car is in crash mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that you have it
conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01 Safety
Child safety
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in rearfacing child seats until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then
front-facing booster cushions/child seats until
up to 10 years of age.
NOTE
01
WARNING
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Child seats
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size, for more information, see page 32.
Location of child seats
You may place:
• a child seat/booster cushion on the front
NOTE
passenger seat, provided the passenger
airbag is not activated1.
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
• one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for your particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with
optimum conditions for your child to travel
safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety
equipment fits and is easy to use.
1
G020128
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child
to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A
child in the front passenger seat could suffer
serious injury if the airbag deploys.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included with the product.
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
31
01 Safety
Child safety
01
WARNING
Label Airbag
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated2.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button
must not be used, as they could cause the
seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
The label is visible when the passenger door is
opened, see the figure on page 22.
Recommended child seats3
Weight
Front seatA
Group 0
Rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max. 10 kg
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max. 13 kg
Group 0
max. 10 kg
Group 0+
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
(U)
max. 13 kg
2
3
32
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seatA
Rear seat
Group 0
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective
cushion between the child seat and the instrument panel.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.
max. 10 kg
01
Type approval: E5 03135
Group 0+
Type approval: E5 03135
max. 13 kg
(L)
Group 0
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
max. 10 kg
(U)
(U)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.B
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective
cushion between the child seat and the instrument panel.
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B
(L)
Group 0+
max. 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03135
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
(L)
``
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seatA
Group 1
Rear seat
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX
fixture system and straps.B
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Group 1
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg
(U)
(U)
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt
and strapsB
15-25 kg
Group 2
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
34
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
(L)
(L)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seatA
Rear seat
Group 2/3
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 03139
Type approval: E5 03139
(UF)
(UF)
15-36 kg
01
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
A
B
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.
To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag
is activated4.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat if the airbag is
activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life.
4
For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.
35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), frontfacing child seat
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see
illustration above).
C
Full size, rear-facing child
seat
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
G009182
Full size, front-facing child
seat
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Description
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
A
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
36
Description
Size
class
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included
on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max. 10 kg
max. 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max. 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OKA
(IL)
C
X
OKA
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
OKA
(IL)
C
X
OKA
(IL)
``
37
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
B
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKB
(IUF)
B1
X
OKB
(IUF)
A
X
OKB
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
B
38
In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position.
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
01 Safety
Child safety
Upper mounting points for child seats
01
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with
folding head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
G026316
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
Location, upper attachment points.
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for child seats. These mounting points
are located on the rear side of the rear seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
For detailed information on how to secure the
child seat in the upper mounting points, refer
to the instructions from the child seat manufacturer.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head restraint
leg before they are tensioned at the attachment point.
The child seat's straps must be routed
between the head restraint and the backrest.
39
Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................
Overview, right-hand drive cars..............................................................
Driver's door control panel.....................................................................
Combined instrument panel....................................................................
Indicator and warning symbols...............................................................
Information display..................................................................................
Electrical socket......................................................................................
Lighting panel..........................................................................................
Left-hand stalk switch.............................................................................
Right-hand stalk switch..........................................................................
Cruise control*........................................................................................
Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers.............................
Parking brake..........................................................................................
Power windows.......................................................................................
Windows, rearview and door mirrors......................................................
Power sunroof*.......................................................................................
Personal preferences..............................................................................
42
44
46
47
48
52
54
56
61
64
67
69
70
71
72
74
78
80
HomeLinkŸ *............................................................................................ 83
40
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
02
42
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, left-hand drive cars
Steering wheel adjustment
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Bonnet release
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator
Control panel
Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Door handle, lock button.
Interior rearview mirror
Display for climate control and infotainment system
Infotainment system
Air vents in dashboard
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Air vent for side window
Climate control
Cruise control
Gear lever
Horn, airbag
Hazard warning flashers
Combined instrument panel
Door handle
Keypad for infotainment system
Glovebox
Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp
washers
Parking brake
Ignition switch
Sunroof controls
02
Electrical socket/cigarette lighter
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
Switch, optional equipment
No function
No function
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
43
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
02
44
02 Instruments and controls
Overview, right-hand drive cars
Electrical socket, cigarette lighter
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS
No function
Switch, optional equipment
No function
Parking brake
Sunroof controls
Control panel
Ignition switch
Glovebox
Windscreen wipers and washers, headlamp washers
Door handle
Air vent for side window
Air vents in instrument panel
Gear lever
Climate control
02
Cruise control
Combined instrument panel
Horn, airbag
Keypad for infotainment system
Hazard warning flashers
Controls for climate control, infotainment
system and personal preferences
Door handle, lock button
Infotainment system
Lighting, fuel filler flap opener
Display for climate control and infotainment system
Direction indicators, main beam, trip computer
Interior rearview mirror
Bonnet release
Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat airbag indicator
Steering wheel adjustment
Switch for interior lighting
Reading lamp, left-hand side
45
02 Instruments and controls
Driver's door control panel
Driver's door control panel
02
Power windows
Door mirror, left-hand side
Door mirrors, setting
Door mirror, right-hand side
46
02 Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
G029046
02
Speedometer.
Direction indicators, left.
Warning symbol.
Information display – Shows information or
warning messages, outside temperature
and clock. When the outside temperature
is between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illuminates on the display. This warns of icy
roads. The outside temperature gauge
may show a slightly high reading after the
car has been stationary.
Information symbol.
Tachometer – Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
Indicator and warning symbols.
Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, page
62.
Main beam indicator.
Display – Display for automatic gear position, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and
cruise control.
Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and
gear positions in the D2 model, see
page 155.
Button for trip meter – Used to measure
short distances. Short presses on the button switches between the two trip meters
T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip meter to zero.
Temperature gauge - Used for the engine
cooling system. A message will appear on
the display if the temperature becomes too
high and the gauge goes into the red zone.
Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front
of the air intake, for example, reduce the
cooling capacity at high outside temperatures and high engine loads.
Indicator and warning symbols.
Direction indicator, right.
47
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check, symbols
02
All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate
when the remote control key is turned to position II before starting. This is to check that the
symbols are working. When the engine starts,
all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when
the brake is disengaged.
Symbols in the centre of the instrument
panel
G030755
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
information display at the same time. The symbol remains visible until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with
the READ button, see page 52. The warning
symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
48
1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear
the message using READ.
If the engine does not start within
five seconds, all symbols extinguish except the symbols for a
fault in the car's emissions system
and for low oil pressure. Certain
symbols may have no function,
depending on the car's specifications.
1
When the symbol illuminates:
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 52.
The yellow information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the
information display. The message
text is cleared using the READ button, see page 52, or disappears
automatically after a period of time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The yellow information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the
READ button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator symbols – left-hand side
Emissions system
Stability system DSTC*
If the symbol illuminates then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection.
G029048
ABS fault
Fault in car's emissions system
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
For information on the system's
functions and symbols, see
page 167.
02
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during
engine preheating. Preheating
occurs when the temperature is
below -2 °C. The car can be started
once the symbol goes out.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the
level in the fuel tank is low, refuel
as soon as possible.
2. Restart the engine.
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp
Stability system DSTC
No function
Engine preheater (diesel)
3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS system checked if the symbol remains lit.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Rear fog lamp
This symbol is lit when the rear fog
lamp is on.
Low level in fuel tank
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
Indicator symbols – right-hand side
Indicator symbol for trailer
This symbol flashes when the
direction indicators are used and
the trailer is connected. If the symbol does not flash then one of the
lamps on the trailer or the car is
02
faulty.
Parking brake applied
G029049
The symbol illuminates when the
parking brake is applied. Always
pull the parking brake lever to the
end position.
Indicator symbol for trailer
NOTE
The symbol illuminates irrespective of how
hard the parking brake is applied.
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Low oil pressure
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
2
50
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated
or illuminates while driving, it
means a fault has been detected in
the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or
IC system. Volvo recommends that
drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop
for inspection.
For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 52.
Low oil pressure2
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone
in a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Alternator not charging
If this symbol illuminates while
driving, a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low.
02 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning symbols
–
Stop the car in a safe place and check the
level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 226. If the reservoir level is below
MIN then the car should not be driven further. Volvo recommends that the car is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols
illuminate at the same time, there
may be a fault in the brake force
distribution system.
have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from
an authorised Volvo workshop.
6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN
then the car should not be driven any further. Have the car transported to a workshop to have the brake system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
High speed
If the car is moving faster than
10 km/h, the symbol illuminates
and one of the texts indicated in
the preceding paragraph appears
on the display.
02
Tailgate reminder
If the tailgate is open, this information symbol will illuminate and
TAILGATE OPEN will appear on
the display.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end
will skid during heavy braking.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2. Restart the engine.
3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see
page 226.
5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can be
driven, with great care, to a workshop to
3
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgate
is not properly closed, the driver will be
reminded of this.
Low speed
If the car moves at a speed less
than 5 km/h, the information symbol illuminates and DRIVER
DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER
DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN
is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as
soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.
Only cars with alarm.
51
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Messages
G029050
02
When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates
the information display shows a supplementary message.
–
Specification
Message
Specification
STOP SAFELYA
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
TIME FOR REGULAR SERVICE
SERVICE
URGENTA
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car
immediately.
SEE MANUALA
Read the Owner's
Manual.
Time for regular
service. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service. The
timing is determined
by the number of kilometres driven,
number of months
since the last service, engine running
time and oil grade.
SERVICE
REQUIREDA
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
SERVICE OVERDUE
HIGH ENGINE
TEMP STOP
ENGINE
Stop the car in a safe
manner and turn off
the engine. Serious
risk of damage.
If the service intervals are not followed
then the warranty
does not cover any
damaged parts.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out the service.
BOOK TIME FOR
SERVICE
Time to book regular
service. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop carries
out the service.
TRANSMISSION
OIL CHANGE NEEDED
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop
checks the car as
soon as possible.
Press the READ button (1).
Switch between messages with the READ button. Fault messages are stored in the memory
until the fault is rectified.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must
be read (press READ) before the previous
activity can be resumed.
52
Message
02 Instruments and controls
Information display
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
REMINDER
CHECK OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level.
The message is
shown every 10
000 km (certain
engine variants). For
information on
checking the oil
level, see page 222.
TRANSMISSION
PERFORMANCE
LOW
The gearbox cannot
handle full capacity.
Drive carefully until
the message clears,
see page 159.
TRANSMISSION
OIL TEMP HIGH
Drive more smoothly
or stop the car in a
safe manner. Disengage the gear and
run the engine at
idling speed until the
message clears. For
more information,
see page 159.
TRANSM OIL
TEMP STOP
SAFELY
Critical fault. Stop
the car immediately
in a safe manner.
Volvo recommends
that an authorised
Volvo workshop is
contacted.B
SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER
MANUAL
Diesel particle filter
requires regeneration, see page 144.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF
The function of the
stability and traction
control system is
reduced, see
page 168 for more
variants.
If shown repeatedly
then Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
A
B
02
Part of message, shown together with information on where
the problem has arisen.
For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see
page 159.
53
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
12 V electrical socket
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
TV screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote control key has been removed or when the car
is locked, for example, when the parking
heater is activated at a preset time.
G019621
02
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the
battery could be drained in the event of such
an occurrence!
Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the
socket to supply current, the remote control
key must be in at least position I, see
page 150.
WARNING
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 201.
Cigarette lighter*
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull
out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
Electrical socket in the rear seat
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel
console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90
W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
G029082
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
Electrical socket in the rear seat.
54
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Electrical socket
The electrical socket in the rear seat can be
used for various accessories, see "12 V electrical socket" above.
02
NOTE
Cigarette lighter does not work in this
socket.
The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. For
the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see
page 150.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
55
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
General
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting
the height of the beam.
02
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the
end positions.
G020139
3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively
to raise or lower beam alignment.
Lighting panel for halogen headlamps1.
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
Light switches
Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have
automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no
control (1).
Position/parking lamps
Position/parking lamps can be switched on
irrespective of remote control key position.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting
–
Front fog lamps*
When the remote control key is in position II the
position/parking lamps and number plate lighting are always on.
Opening the fuel filler flap
Rear fog lamp
1
56
Description of Halogen headlamps, see page 57.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre
position.
Headlamps
Automatic dipped beam*
Dipped beam comes on automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position II,
except when the headlamp control (2) is in the
centre position. If necessary, the automatic
dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that this is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Automatic dipped beam, main beam
1. Turn the remote control key to position II.
2. Dipped beam is activated by means of
turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise
to the end position.
3. Main beam is activated by means of moving the left-hand stalk switch towards the
steering wheel to the end position and
releasing it, see page 61.
The lamps are switched off automatically when
the remote control key is turned to position I or
0.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Instrument lighting
–
The instrument lighting is switched on when
the remote control key is in position II and the
headlamp control (2) is in one of the end positions. The lighting is automatically dimmed
during the day and can be controlled manually
at night.
The light in the button (4) illuminates when the
front fog lamps are switched on.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with
the headlamps or the front fog lamps.
–
–
Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter
or dimmer lighting.
Enhanced display lighting
To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,
clock and outside temperature gauge, these
illuminate when the car is unlocked and when
the remote control key is removed from the
ignition switch. The displays extinguish when
the car is locked.
Fog lamps
NOTE
Press the button (4).
Rear fog lamp
Press the button (6).
The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the combined instrument panel and the light in the button (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Fuel filler flap
Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when
the car is unlocked, see page 132.
Position
Halogen
headlamps
Halogen
headlamps
with DRL*A
Automatic/
deactivated
dipped beam.
Only main
beam flash.
Daytime running lights
Position/parking lamps
Daytime running lights
when the car is
being driven.
Automatic
switching to
parking lights
when the car is
parked.
02
Halogen headlamps
Lighting panel for halogen headlamps, see
page 56.
Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from
country to country.
Front fog lamps*
The front fog lamps can be switched on along
with the headlamps or the position lamps/parking lamps.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
02
A
58
Halogen
headlamps
Halogen
headlamps
with DRL*A
Dipped beam.
Main beam and
main beam
flash work in
this position.
–
Active Xenon headlamps*
Position
Active Xenon
headlamps
Active Xenon
headlamps
with DRL*A
Dipped beam.
Main beam and
main beam
flash work in
this position.
Automatic/
deactivated
dipped beam.
Only main
beam flash.
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights during daytime
driving. Automatic switching
to dipped beam
in poor light
conditions and
when windscreen wipers
or rear fog
lamps are activated.
Position/parking lamps
Daytime running lights
when the car is
being driven.
Automatic
switching to
parking lights
when the car is
parked.
Dipped beam.
Main beam and
main beam
flash work in
this position.
Dipped beam.
Main beam and
main beam
flash work in
this position.
G026507
Position
Lighting panel for active Xenon headlamps.
Daytime running lights - DRL, see page 60.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Active Xenon
headlamps
The light from
the active
Xenon headlamps follows
steering wheel
movement.
Active Xenon
headlamps
with DRL*A
Position
–
Active Xenon
headlamps
–
Active Xenon
headlamps
with DRL*A
Daytime running lights during daytime
driving. Automatic switching
to dipped beam
in poor light
conditions and
when windscreen wipers
or rear fog
lamps are activated.
The active
Xenon headlamps function
can also be
activated in this
position.
A
Daytime running lights - DRL, see page 60.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering wheel
movement in order to provide maximum light-
ing in bends and junctions and so provide
increased safety.
02
The LED
illuminates when the function
is activated. The LED flashes and an error message is shown on the information display in the
event of a malfunction. The function is only
active in twilight or darkness and only when the
car is moving.
The function can be deactivated/activated with
the headlamp control.
G020789
Position
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
02 Instruments and controls
Lighting panel
Daytime running lights - DRL*
02
NOTE
To save fuel, daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Light) can be selected during the day
instead of the more energy-intensive dipped
beam. The daytime running lights mounted in
the spoiler use bright, low-energy diode technology.
To achieve minimal energy consumption,
the rear lights are also switched off when
switching automatically from dipped beam
to DRLs.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
Lighting panel for active Xenon headlamps with
DRL.
Lighting panel for halogen headlamps with DRL.
With the headlamp control in position A, the
daytime running lights are activated automatically during the day. This is regulated by a light
sensor which switches from daytime running
lights to dipped beam off the main headlamps
at dusk or when the daylight becomes too
weak.
For the meaning of the headlamp control's different positions, depending on type of headlamp, see the preceding tables on pages 57
and 58.
60
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with its lights in a correct state and in accordance with applicable
traffic regulations.
Brake light
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking. For information on the Emergency
brake lights and automatic hazard warning
flashers, see page 166.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
Stalk switch positions
Direction indicators
Switching between main and dipped
beam
Short flash sequence
–
Move the stalk switch up or down to
position (A) and release.
> The direction indicators flash 3 times
and the stalk switch returns to its original position.
Continuous flash sequence
–
Move the stalk switch up or down to
end position (B).
> The stalk switch remains in its end position and is moved back manually, or
automatically by steering wheel movement.
Main beam flash and Home safe lighting
Switching between main and dipped
beam.
Main beam flash
–
Move the stalk switch to the end position
(D) and release.
02
The remote control key must be in position II
and the headlamp control in end position, see
page 56, for main beam to be switched on.
Home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked. The standard delay is
301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90
seconds, see page 81.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
Direction indicators - short flash sequence
Direction indicators - continuous flash
sequence
–
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to position (C).
> Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering
wheel to position (C) and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
Main beam flash only works when the remote
control key is inserted into the ignition switch.
1
Factory settings.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
Trip computer*
NOTE
If a warning message interrupts while you
are using the trip computer, this message
must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by
pressing the READ button and revert to the
trip computer function.
02
Functions
G029052
The trip computer displays the following information:
READ - confirms
Thumbwheel2
– browse between menus
and options in the trip computer list.
RESET2 - resets
Controls
To scroll through trip computer information
turn the thumbwheel either up or down in
steps. The menus are in an infinite loop.
2
3
4
62
•
•
•
•
•
•
AVERAGE
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the latest reset, which is performed with the
RESET button.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater is used.
--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED
--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS
KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE
The range to empty is calculated based on the
average fuel consumption over the last 30 km.
No guaranteed range remains when the display
shows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
". Refuel as soon as possible.
--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK
DSTC ON *, see page 167
--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3
AVERAGE SPEED
Average speed is calculated from the latest
reset, which is performed with the RESET button.
INSTANTANEOUS
Current fuel consumption is calculated every
second. The information on the display is
updated every couple of seconds. When the
car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
Certain markets.
Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
During the period for regeneration4 fuel consumption may increase, see page 144.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
fuel consumption is changed due to a
change in driving style or if a fuel-driven
heater is used for example.
MPH ACTUAL SPEED3
Current speed is displayed in mph.
02 Instruments and controls
Left-hand stalk switch
Resetting
1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or
--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE .
02
2. Reset with one press of the RESET button.
3. One long press of the RESET button (at
least 5 seconds) resets both average
speed and average consumption simultaneously.
63
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
Windscreen wipers
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch to make a
single sweep.
02
Intermittent wiping
You can adjust and set a suitable
speed for intermittent wiping. Turn
the thumbwheel (2) up for a shorter
interval between sweeps. Turn it
down to increase the delay.
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal
speed.
Windscreen and headlamp washers
The wipers sweep at high speed.
Rain sensor - On/Off
Thumbwheel
Wiper, rear window
Windscreen wipers off
The windscreen wipers are off
when the stalk switch is in position
0.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter –
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
64
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Windscreen/headlamp washer
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers. The wipers will make several more
sweeps once the stalk switch is released.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed as follows:
Dipped beam selected with the switch on lighting panel:
The headlamps are washed the first time the
windscreen is washed. Within the next ten
minutes, they are washed every fifth wash
cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer
interval the headlamps are washed each time.
Parking/position lamps selected with the
switch on the lighting panel:
• Active Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.
The switch on the lighting panel is in position
0:
• Active Xenon headlamps are only washed
every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the
time that elapses.
• Halogen headlamps are not washed.
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should
fill the washer fluid is shown in the combined
instrument panel's display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it.
Rear window wiper and washer
makes several extra sweeps once washing has
finished.
Rain sensor*
02
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats. The
rear window wiper works again after a cooling period (30 seconds or longer, depending
on the heat in the motor and the outside
temperature).
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window
wiping. If the rear window wiper is already on
at normal speed, no change is made.
The function for intermittent wiping for reverse
can be deactivated. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of the
button.
Constant speed: Depress the bottom of
the button.
Move the stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping. The wiper blade
G029053
Wiper – reversing
The rain sensor automatically activates the
windscreen wipers based on how much water
it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel (2), see page 64.
Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sensitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an
extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is
turned upwards).
On/Off
When activating the rain sensor, the remote
control key must be in position I or II and the
windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 (not activated).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
02 Instruments and controls
Right-hand stalk switch
Activating the rain sensor:
02
–
Press the button (1), see page 64. A display
symbol shows that the rain sensor is
active.
To turn the rain sensor off, either:
1. Press the button (1)
2. Press the stalk switch downward to
another wiper program. If the stalk switch
is raised, the rain sensor will remain active,
the wipers make an extra sweep and then
return to rain sensor mode when the stalk
is released to position 0 (not activated), see
page 64.
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the ignition is switched off.
IMPORTANT
At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the
rain sensor by pressing the button (1) while
the remote control key is in position I or II.
Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could
start swiping and become damaged.
Thumbwheel
Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of
wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is
66
selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain
sensor is selected.
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
Activating
Increasing or decreasing speed
NOTE
A temporary increase in speed (less than
one minute) using the accelerator, such as
while overtaking, does not affect the cruise
control setting. When you release the accelerator, the car will return to the programmed
speed.
02
Temporary disengagement
G020141
G029054
–
The controls for cruise control are to the left of
the steering wheel.
Setting the desired speed:
1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is
shown on the combined instrument panel.
2. Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed.
CRUISE-ON appears in the combined
instrument panel.
–
Increase or decrease the speed by pressing and holding + or –. The speed of the car
when the button is released is set as the
new speed.
A brief press (less than half a second) on + or
– changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.
Press 0 to disengage the cruise control
temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the
combined instrument panel. The speed set
earlier is stored in the memory.
The cruise control is also temporarily disengaged when:
• the brake pedal or clutch pedal is
depressed
• speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when travelling uphill
• the gear selector is moved to position N
• wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs
• a temporary increase in speed lasts longer
than one minute.
Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds
below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.
1
Depending on engine type.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
02 Instruments and controls
Cruise control*
Return to the set speed
– Press this button to resume the
previously set speed. CRUISE
ON appears on the combined
instrument panel.
02
Disengaging
–
68
Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise
control. CRUISE ON clears on the combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
02 Instruments and controls
Keypad in the steering wheel*
Button functions
in order to enable control of the phone system
with the arrow keys.
To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To return
to the phone menu, press EXIT once again.
02
With the ENTER button you can select, activate and deactivate options in menus. The button can also be used to access the folder structure and start the playback of audio files if a
disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/
CD changer*. For more information, see
page 262.
The keypad is available in two versions depending
on the equipment in the car.
The four buttons at the bottom of the steering
wheel keypad control the radio and the phone.
The function of a button depends on which
system is active. The steering wheel keypad
can be used to scroll between preset stations,
change CD tracks and adjust the volume.
–
Press and hold one of the arrow keys to
fast forward/reverse or search for the next
station.
The phone must be active to make settings in
the phone system. Activate the phone function
with the PHONE button in the centre console
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
69
02 Instruments and controls
Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers
Steering wheel adjustment
WARNING
NOTE
Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,
never while driving. Before driving, check
that the steering wheel is fixed in position.
02
G020143
Hazard warning flashers
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you best.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the
steering wheel lightly at the same time as
you push the lever back.
70
G020144
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and reach.
Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction
indicators flash) when the car is stopped where
it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press
the button to activate the function.
A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking
activates the hazard warning flashers automatically, see page 166. The function can be
deactivated with the button.
Regulations regarding the use of hazard
warning flashers vary from country to country.
02 Instruments and controls
Parking brake
General
> The instrument panel's warning symbol
is illuminated.
NOTE
The warning lamp symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates irrespective of
how hard the parking brake is applied.
Disengaging the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
02
2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,
press the button, lower the parking brake
lever and release the button.
> The instrument panel's warning symbol
is switched off.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake
lever must be pulled up a little bit further.
• When parking the vehicle, always engage
Instrument panel warning symbol and warning
label for risk of crushing.
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
WARNING
Make sure that children, other passengers
or objects are not in danger of becoming
trapped in any way when the parking brake
is applied or released by the driver.
Applying the parking brake
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Pull the lever firmly.
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in
P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
71
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Operation
02
Driver's door
The power windows are operated using the
controls in the doors. The key position must be
I or II for the power windows to operate.
WARNING
The function that interrupts the movement
of the windows in the event of them being
blocked works with both automatic and
manual closing, although not with pinch
protection deployed.
The windows continue to work for a limited
amount of time when the car is stopped and
after the remote control key is removed, provided none of the doors is opened. Operate the
windows with caution.
To open a window:
–
WARNING
Depress the front of the control.
If there are children in the car:
To close a window:
–
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows by removing the remote
control key if the driver leaves the car.
Raise the front of the control.
Remote control and lock buttons
To operate the power windows with lock buttons and remote control, see pages 124 and
132.
WARNING
Make sure that children and other passengers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows. Pay close attention if
the windows are closed with the remote
control.
Controls, power windows front
The driver can operate both of the power windows from the driver's seat.
The windows can be opened and closed in two
ways:
Manual operation
Depress one of the controls (1) gently or raise
it gently. The power window opens or closes
as long as the switch is actuated.
Automatic operation
Fully depress one of the controls (1) or raise it,
then release. The side window will then open
or close automatically. If the window is
72
obstructed by an object, the movement will
stop.
Make sure that children and other passengers cannot be trapped in any way when
closing the windows.
02 Instruments and controls
Power windows
Passenger seat
02
Passenger seat.
The control in the front passenger door operates that window only.
73
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Interior rearview mirror
Interior rearview mirror with compass*
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming when disturbed by light from behind.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car
is pointing. Eight different directions are shown
with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Calibrating the compass
Dipping
Control for dimming
Normal position
Dimmed position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)
is not available in mirrors with automatic dimming.
74
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G031045
G031043
02
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass is set for the geographical area
to which the car was delivered. The compass
should be calibrated if the car is moved across
several magnetic zones.
1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the
engine running at idling speed.
2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 seconds. Following which, the character C is
shown (the button is concealed so use a
paper clip for example to press it in).
3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current magnetic
zone is displayed.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the
number for the required magnetic zone (1–
15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic
zones for the compass.
02
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C.
G020151
7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum
speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction
is shown on the display, which indicates
that the calibration is complete.
G020154
Magnetic zones, Australia.
G020152
G020150
Magnetic zones, Asia.
G020153
6. Following which, press and hold the button
in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand
drive cars and R for right-hand drive.
Magnetic zones, Europe.
Magnetic zones, South America.
Magnetic zones, Africa.
``
75
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Door mirrors
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in key
position I and II.
02
Retracting the mirrors
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.
WARNING
The door mirror on the driver's side is the
wide-angled type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than they
actually are.
The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors
are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The
rearview mirrors can be operated in key position I and II.
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light on the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
If the car is locked with the remote control
and is then started, the door mirrors will still
be extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated
under Car settings… Mirror fold on
locking, see page 81 for a description of the
menu system.
Resetting to neutral
1. Press the L and R button at the same time.
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset to the neutral
position for electric retracting and extending to
work.
2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mirrors.
Automatic retracting/extending
2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R
button. The mirrors are now reset to the
neutral.
Folding out the mirrors
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control or using the Keyless-system,
see page 128, the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
goes out.
76
NOTE
The door mirrors will not be extended automatically during unlocking if they were
retracted using the controls in the door.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when
the approach lighting or home safe lighting is
activated.
02 Instruments and controls
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*
BLIS is an information system that under certain conditions can help to draw the driver's
attention to vehicles moving in the same direction in the so-called "blind spot", see
page 171.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
77
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
Open positions
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
02
Switch off the supply to the power sunroof
by removing the remote control key if the
driver leaves the car.
Ventilation position
Open:
–
Press the rear edge of the control (E)
upward.
Close:
–
Pull the rear edge of the control (F) downward.
From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:
G007503
–
Sliding position
Automatic operation
–
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened in two positions:
Ventilation position, up at the rear edge
Sliding position, backwards/forwards
The remote control key must be in position I or
II.
Manual operation
Open:
Opening, manual
–
Closing, automatic
Opening, ventilation position
Closing, ventilation position
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Pull the control past the point of resistance
(B) to the rear end position (A) or past the
point of resistance (C) to the forward end
position (D) and release. The sunroof
opens/closes completely.
Opening, automatic
Closing, manual
78
Pull the control rearward to the end position (A) and release.
Pull the control rearward to the point of
resistance (B). The sunroof moves to maximum open position as long as the button
is kept depressed.
Close:
–
Press the control forward to the point of
resistance (C). The sunroof moves to
02 Instruments and controls
Power sunroof*
closed position as long as the button is
kept depressed.
WARNING
Wind deflector
If you need to interrupt closing:
–
Press the lock button again.
02
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing, not
manual closing.
Closing with remote control or lock
button
Make sure that children or other passengers
are not in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the sunroof with the
remote control. Always operate the sunroof
with caution.
Sunscreen
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the
handle and slide the screen forward to close it.
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded
up when the sunroof is in the open position.
Pinch protection
G020157
The sunroof's pinch protection function is activated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If
blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position.
–
One long press on the lock button closes
the sunroof and all the windows. The doors
and the tailgate are locked.
WARNING
The sunroof's pinch protection function only
operates during automatic closing, not during manual closing.
Make sure that nobody is in danger of
becoming trapped in any way when closing
the sunroof.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
79
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
Possible settings
Display
Clock, adjustment
Personal preferences can be set for some of
the car's functions. This applies to locks, climate control and audio functions. For audio
functions, see page 252.
MENU
The hour and minute are each adjusted separately.
EXIT
ENTER
Control panel
Navigation
Use
The settings are shown on the display (1).
Open the menu to enter settings:
1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow
up" or "arrow down" on the navigation button (5).
2. Select the number for adjustment using
"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the navigation button.
3. Press ENTER to start the clock.
1. Press MENU (2).
NOTE
2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings… with
the navigation button (5).
If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM
is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow
down" after the final minute number has
been adjusted.
3. Press ENTER (4).
4. Select an alternative with the navigation
button (5).
5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.
Activated function is shown in the display
. Deactivated function is shown in
with
the display with
.
Close the menu:
–
Control panel.
80
Press EXIT (3) for approx. one second.
Climate settings
Automatic blower adjust
The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in
cars equipped with ECC:
–
Select from Low, Normal and High.
Recirculation timer
When the timer is active, the air recirculates for
3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air
temperature.
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
–
Select On/Off depending on whether or not
you wish the recirculation timer to be
active.
Reset all
Resets the climate function options to the factory settings.
Lock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feedback when the car is locked with the remote
control. The On/Off option is available.
Doors – auto lock
Car settings
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate can be locked automatically.
The On/Off option is available.
Retract mirrors when locking*
Doors unlock
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control the door mirrors can be retracted/extended automatically. The On/Off option
is available.
• All doors – one press of the remote control
Reduced guard*
The deadlocks function can be temporarily
deactivated and the alarm level reduced if
someone wishes to remain in the car and the
doors have to be locked from the outside. The
Activate once and Ask on exit options are
available, see pages 133 and 136.
Unlock confirm. light
The hazard warning flashers can provide feedback when the car is unlocked with the remote
control. The On/Off option is available.
1
door handle button on cars with the keyless
system:
• Auto. close all windows - all windows
02
and the sunroof are closed simultaneously
with one long press on the lock button.
This function can be selected for the unlock
button on the remote control and the front
doors' central locking button:
• Auto. open all windows – all windows are
opened simultaneously with one long
press on the unlock button.
There are two alternatives for unlocking:
unlocks both doors and the tailgate.
• Driver door, then all – one press of the
remote control unlocks the driver's door. A
second press then unlocks the passenger
door and the tailgate.
Keyless entry
• All doors - both doors and the tailgate are
unlocked simultaneously1.
• Any door – any door or the tailgate can be
unlocked separately.
Simultaneous closing/opening of all
windows
This function can be selected for the lock button on the remote control and the front doors'
central locking button, as well as the outside
Approach lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
switched on when the approach lighting button
is pressed - see page 124.
The following alternatives are available:
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
Home safe lighting
Select the time the car's lights should remain
on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled
back after the remote control key has been
removed - see page 61.
The following alternatives are available:
Both doors and the tailgate can also be locked simultaneously.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
02 Instruments and controls
Personal preferences
02
• 30 seconds
• 60 seconds
• 90 seconds
Information
• VIN number… - (Vehicle Identification
Number) is the car's unique identity number.
• Number of keys… - The number of keys
registered for the car is shown.
82
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
General
G030070
•
HomeLinkŸ1 is a programmable remote control
which can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor lighting etc.)
and in doing so replace their remote controls.
For more information on HomeLinkŸ, visit:
www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number, +49 6838 907 277).
1
Programming HomeLinkŸ
WARNING
If HomeLinkŸ is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the door
or gate while it is moving.
•
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
•
Do not use HomeLinkŸ for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold. See the
section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on
page 84.
NOTE
02
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLinkŸ can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLinkŸ for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLinkŸ buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLinkŸ is set in "learn mode" and
ready for programming.
1. Aim the original remote control towards the
HomeLinkŸ button to be programmed and
hold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do not
obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLinkŸ.
2. Depress the button on the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLinkŸ simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator lamp
has changed over from slow to rapid flashing. Both the buttons must be released
when the indicator lamp flashes quickly.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
02
3. Depress the HomeLinkŸ button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is activated. If the door is not activated, press the
programmed HomeLinkŸ button and hold
it depressed and check the indicator lamp.
> Constant glow: The indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow when the
button is kept depressed, this indicates
that the programming is complete.
The garage door, gate or similar should
now be activated when the programmed HomeLinkŸ button is
depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator lamp
flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds
and then changes over to a constant
glow. In which case, continue with the
programming steps 4-6 in order to complete the programming of a device with
rolling code (usually a garage door
opener).
4. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
2
84
5. Depress and release the receiver's "programming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step must
be carried out within this period.
6. While the receiver's "programming button"
is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLinkŸ being programmed and hold it
depressed for approx. 2 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence up to 3 times to conclude the
programming.
Operation
When HomeLinkŸ is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Press the programmed button and hold it
depressed until the garage door, alarm system,
etc. is activated (may take several seconds).
Naturally the original remote controls can still
be used in parallel with HomeLinkŸ if required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLinkŸ will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLinkŸ on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLinkŸ buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLinkŸ buttons at the same time, not each
button individually. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see the following
section "Programming individual buttons".
1. Depress the two outer buttons on
HomeLinkŸ and do not release until the
indicator lamp starts to flash.
2. Release the buttons.
> HomeLinkŸ is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be reprogrammed, see section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 83.
02 Instruments and controls
HomeLinkŸ *
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLinkŸ button,
proceed as follows:
02
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkŸ
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
start with step 1 in section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 83.
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLinkŸ, visit: www.homelink.com or
ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
General information on climate control................................................... 88
Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 90
Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 93
Air distribution......................................................................................... 96
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*.. 97
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)..................................................... 100
86
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
CLIMATE CONTROL
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
Air conditioning
Passenger compartment filter
The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment. The car is equipped with either
manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,
Electronic Climate Control).
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is only cleaned with one filter. This must
be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the
Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment,
it may be necessary to replace the filter more
often.
NOTE
The air conditioning system can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
air in the passenger compartment and prevent the windows from misting, it should
always be on.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct
filter is fitted.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows
by first using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, clean the windows with a normal window cleaning agent.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control
air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the
windscreen).
Display
Open
There is a display above the climate control
panel. This displays climate control settings.
Closed
Personal preferences
Vertical airflow
Lateral airflow
You can set preferences for two climate control
functions:
Aim the outer vents towards the side windows
to remove misting from the front side windows.
• Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to
During cold weather - Close the centre vents
for optimum comfort and best demisting.
cars with ECC).
• Recirculation timer for passenger compartment air.
For information about these settings, see
page 80.
88
G019942
03
Air vents in the instrument panel
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
General information on climate control
ECC*
Side windows and sunroof
Actual temperature
To ensure that the air conditioning works satisfactorily, close all side windows and the sunroof (if fitted).
The temperature you select corresponds to the
physical experience with reference to factors
such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation
in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects the side from which the sun is shining
into the passenger compartment. This means
that the temperature can differ between the
right and left-hand air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on
both sides.
Acceleration
The air conditioning system switches off temporarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a
temporary rise in temperature.
03
Condensation
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
Sensor location
• The sun sensor is on the top side of the
instrument panel.
• The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is behind the climate control
panel.
• The outside temperature sensor is located
on the door mirror.
• The humidity sensor is located in the interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
89
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
Control panel
03
Fan
Functions
2. Recirculation
Recirculation
1. Fan
Recirculation can be used to
shut out bad air, exhaust
fumes, etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated. No outside air
is taken into the car. Recirculation (together with the air conditioning system) cools the passenger compartment more
quickly in a warm climate. If the air in the car
recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
Heated front right seat
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature
90
Increase or decrease the fan
speed by turning the knob.
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in
the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are
switched off. The display shows the fan symbol
and OFF.
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
Timer
4. Air distribution
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
See page 80 for activating/deactivating the
function. When the Defroster (3) program is
selected, recirculation is deactivated.
3. Defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
A symbol on the display
above the climate control
panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
Refer to the table on page 96.
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (5))
•
recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
03
Higher heat:
–
Press the button once – both lights illuminate.
Lower heat:
5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
• the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
6. and 7. Heated front seats*
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
OFF: The air conditioning is
off.
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button). An illuminated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in
the button shows the function selected.
–
Press the button once – one light illuminates.
Heat off:
–
Press the button three times – light not illuminated.
8. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mirrors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear window and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or automatically. Switch off manually with one press
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Climate control
Manual climate control, AC
on the button. Automatic switching off disconnects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside temperature.
03
During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
9. Temperature
Select cooling or heating for
both driver and passenger
side.
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
Control panel
03
AUTO
Functions
Fan
1. AUTO
2. Fan
The AUTO function automatically regulates climate control and maintains the
selected temperature. The
AUTO function controls heating, air conditioning, fan
speed, recirculation, and air
Recirculation/Air quality system
Defroster
Air distribution
AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off
Heated front left seat
distribution.
Heated front right seat
If you select one or more manual functions, the
other functions continue to be controlled automatically. All manual settings are switched off
when AUTO is switched on. The display shows
AUTO CLIMATE.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
Temperature selector
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
NOTE
If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the
fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan
and the air conditioning are switched off.
The display shows the fan symbol and
OFF.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
3. Recirculation
03
The function is selected to
shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passenger compartment. The air in
the passenger compartment
is recirculated, i.e. no outside
air is taken into the car when
this function is activated. If the air in the car
recirculates for too long, there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Timer
The timer function reduces the risk of icing,
misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).
To activate/deactivate the function see
page 80.
The air quality system consists of a multi-filter
and a sensor. The filter separates gases and
particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment. When
the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air
intakes are closed and the air in the passenger
compartment is recirculated. A green light (A)
illuminates in the button when the air quality
sensor is active.
Activating the air quality sensor:
–
Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality
sensor (normal setting).
Or:
–
Switch between three functions by pressing repeatedly the recirculation button.
• Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)
NOTE
illuminates.
When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
3. Air quality system*
Same button as recirculation.
• No recirculation engaged, provided it is not
required for cooling in hot weather – light
not illuminated.
• Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illuminates.
Keep the following in mind:
• As a rule, the air quality sensor should
always be engaged.
• Recirculation is limited in cold weather to
avoid misting.
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
• The defroster functions for the front, side
and rear windows can be used to demist
the windows.
4. Defroster
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air
flows to the windows at high
fan speed. The light in the
defroster button illuminates
when the function is active.
The following also takes place when the
defroster function is activated in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
• the air conditioning (AC) is automatically
switched on (can be switched off with the
AC button (6)
• recirculation is automatically disengaged.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
5. Air distribution
The airflow can be distributed
to the windows, dashboard
vents or floor by pressing the
air distribution buttons.
03 Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC*
A symbol on the display above the climate control panel and an illuminated light in the relevant
button indicate which function has been
selected.
7 and 8. Heated front seats*
To activate front seat heating:
Refer to the table on page 96.
6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)
ON: The air conditioning is on.
It is controlled by the system's
AUTO function. This way,
incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
OFF: Off
When the defroster function is activated the air
conditioning is automatically switched on (can
be switched off with the AC button).
Higher heat:
–
Lower heat:
–
The climate control system's demisting
function with humidity sensor is significantly
reduced with the air conditioning in deactivated mode (OFF), as well as with manually
selected air distribution and fan speed.
During cold weather the defrosting* also continues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear
window and door mirrors free of ice and mist.
The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted
to the outside temperature. This function must
be switched off manually.
Press the button three times – light not illuminated.
9. Rear window and door mirror
defrosters
Heating is used to quickly
remove misting and ice from
the rear window and door mirrors. Press the button once to
start simultaneous rear window and rearview mirror
defrosting. The function is
active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
The function is switched off manually or automatically. Switch off manually with one press
03
10. Temperature selector
The temperatures on the
driver and passenger sides
can be set independently.
Press the button once – one light illuminates.
Heat off:
–
NOTE
Press the button once – both lights illuminate.
on the button. Automatic switching off disconnects the rear window and door mirrors after
12 – 20 minutes depending on outside temperature.
Press the button once to activate one side only. Press
again to activate the other
side. Press the button a third time to activate
both sides.
The active side is indicated by the button's light
and in the display above the climate control
panel.
When the car is started, the most recent setting
is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Climate control
Air distribution
03
96
Air distribution
Use:
Air distribution
Use:
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents. The
air is not recirculated. Air
conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and windows.
Some air flows from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen and side
windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to prevent misting
and icing in a cold and
humid climate. (Not
for low fan speed.)
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air flows to
the dashboard air vents and
windows.
to warm the feet.
Airflow to the head and
chest from the dashboard
air vents.
to ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows, from
dashboard air vents and to
the floor.
to provide cooler air for
the feet or warmer air
to the upper body in
cold weather or hot,
dry weather.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
General information about heaters
Refuelling
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the parking heater is switched
off automatically and a message appears on
the information display.
The parking heater heats the engine and passenger compartment and can be started
directly or with the timer.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system calculates when heating should be started
based on the outside temperature.
–
Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the
battery and impair starting.
WARNING
NOTE
When the parking heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
03
IMPORTANT
At -10 °C or lower the maximum running time
of the parking heater is 50 minutes.
The car must be outdoors when the petrol
or diesel heater is used.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk READ button once.
The car should be driven for the same time
as the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace
the energy consumed by the heater when it
is used on a regular basis.
Warning decal on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Check on the information display that the
parking heater is switched off. When it is
running, the information display shows
PARK HEAT ON.
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
97
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
Activating the heater
Symbols and display messages
When one of the timer's settings or
Direct start is activated, the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and
the information display shows an
explanatory text.
G029052
03
Display
Specification
FUEL HEATER ON
The heater is
switched on and
running.
TIMER IS SET FOR
FUEL HEATER
Reminder that the
heater will start at
the set time after the
car has been left,
when the remote
control key is
removed from the
ignition switch.
READ button
Thumbwheel1
RESET button1
Display
Specification
HEATER STOPPED LOW BATTERY
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine.
HEATER STOPPED LOW FUEL
LEVEL
The heater has been
stopped by the car's
electronics in order
to facilitate starting
the engine as well as
50 km driving.
Direct start and immediate stop
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT
START PARK HEAT OFF or DIRECT
START PARK HEAT ON.
2. Long presses on the RESET button
change between the two alternatives.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parking
heater switched on manually or with programmed timer.
DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parking
heater switched off.
1
98
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*
With the direct start of the heater it will be activated for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will
begin as soon as the engine coolant has
reached the correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
parking heater is running.
Setting the timer
The time when the car shall be used and heated
is specified with the timer.
Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.
1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK
HEAT TIMER --:-- ON.
7. Press RESET to activate the timer.
NOTE
After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can
be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with
the thumbwheel.
Set the alternative time in the same way as
TIMER 1.
03
Deactivating a timer-started heater
A timer-started heater can be switched off
manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as follows:
1. Press the READ button.
2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text
PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT
TIMER 2.
The text ON flashes on the display.
3. Press RESET.
2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) on
the RESET button in order to access the
flashing time setting.
The text OFF is shown with a constant
glow and the heater is switched OFF.
3. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
A timer-started heater can be switched off in
accordance with the instructions in the section
"Direct start and immediate stop".
4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flashing minutes setting.
5. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
99
03 Climate control
Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)
Auxiliary heater (diesel)
In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may
be required for achieving the correct temperature in the engine and passenger compartment
during cold weather.
03
The heater starts automatically when extra
heat is required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when
the correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on
or off manually but is only controlled by the
car's electronics.
When the auxiliary heater is active there may
be smoke from underneath the car, which is
perfectly normal.
100
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Climate control
03
101
Front seats............................................................................................
Interior lighting......................................................................................
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment...................................
Rear seat...............................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
102
104
109
112
116
118
INTERIOR
04 Interior
Front seats
Seating position, manual seat
Backrest rake: turn the wheel.
Seating position, power seat*
Control panel for power seat*.
Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat and
adjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before setting off, never while driving.
Check that the seat is locked in position.
04
The driver's and passenger seats can be
adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving
positions.
When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest to
pick it up from down at the seatbelt guide,
not over the shoulder.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
changing the position setting.
Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion
(driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/
down.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Lumbar support1, turn the wheel.
1
104
Also applies to power seat.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G020199
NOTE
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote control key without the key being inserted into the
ignition switch. The seat can always be
adjusted in key position I or II.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat, forwards/backwards
Seat, up/down
Backrest rake
04 Interior
Front seats
An overload protection is deployed if one of the
seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the
ignition and wait a short time before adjusting
the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings
can be adjusted at a time.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 1–3 until the
seat stops. If you release the button then the
movement of the seat will stop.
Emergency stop
Memory function
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
• Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock button on the same remote control key) and
open the driver's door. The driver's seat
will automatically adopt the position that is
stored in the remote control key's memory
(if the seat has been moved since you
locked the car).
Entry to the rear seat
WARNING
04
Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do
not play with the controls.
Check that there are no objects in front of,
behind or under the seat during adjustment.
G020200
Ensure that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped.
Buttons for memory function.
Store setting
1. Adjust seat.
2. Press and hold button M while pressing
button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.
2
3
Memory in remote control key
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's
seat2. Proceed as follows:
• Adjust the seat as you want it.
• Lock the car by pressing the lock button on
the remote control key that you normally
use. This stores the positions of the seat in
the remote control key's memory3.
Handle for lowering the backrest
Button for moving the power seat longitudinally
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
105
04 Interior
Front seats
Push the seat backward:
NOTE
No one may sit in the seat when it is pushed
forward for entry into the rear seat.
NOTE
Lower the seat before it is pushed forward otherwise there is a risk that the head
restraint makes contact with the sun visor.
04
Manual seat
Push the seat forward:
Lift the handle.
Fold the backrest forward and slide the
seat forward.
Push the seat backward.
2. Adjust the seat longitudinally.
3. Fold the backrest back up.
4. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
If the seat has not returned to the same position, as before it was folded for entry, after having been pushed back - then proceed as follows:
1. Sit down in the seat.
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt
guide, see also page 18.
106
2. Lift the handle (1), see page 104, and push
the seat to the rear end position.
04 Interior
Front seats
3. Continue to lift of the handle, and push the
seat forward to the desired position and
release the handle.
Power seat*
Push the seat forward:
04
Lift the handle.
Hold down the front section of the button.
Fold the backrest forward to the locked
position.
If the seat is set in a higher position - then
it will be lowered automatically to avoid the
head restraint making contact with the sun
visor.
Release the seatbelt from the seatbelt
guide, see also page 18.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
107
04 Interior
Front seats
Push the seat backward:
WARNING
Check that the backrest is properly folded
back by pushing and pulling the head
restraint.
The belt on the front passenger side must be
in the belt guide during driving, even when
there is no passenger sitting in the seat.
Inlaid mats*
04
Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especially
produced for your car.
WARNING
Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.
Hold down the rear section of the button.
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.
NOTE
The seat can only be moved to the very front
(+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to and
from the rear seat when the backrest has
been folded forward. If the backrest is
folded back when the seat is in the front
position then the seat automatically moves
back approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.
108
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
Reading lamps and interior lighting
Roof lighting
Glovebox lighting
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
Courtesy lighting
Cargo area lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror*
G020201
04
G007604
Controls in roof console for front reading lamps
and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off
Interior lighting
Passenger compartment lighting in rear seat and
cargo area.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on in key position I and II as well
as when the engine is running. The lighting can
also be activated within 30 minutes after:
• the engine has been switched off and the
remote control key is in position 0
• the car has been unlocked but the engine
G020210
Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off
The lamp is automatically switched on and off
respectively when the cover is opened or
closed.
Apart from the passenger compartment lighting the cargo area has a further lamp on its lefthand side.
The lighting in the passenger compartment and
cargo area is switched on and off respectively
when the tailgate is opened or closed.
has not been started.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
04 Interior
Interior lighting
Automatic lighting
Using the switch (2), see page 109, three positions can be selected for the lighting the passenger compartment:
• Off – right-hand side (marked with 0)
depressed, automatic lighting switched
off.
• Neutral position – automatic lighting activated. The dimmer function is active.
04
• On – left-hand side depressed, passenger
compartment lighting on.
Neutral position
When the switch (2) is in neutral position passenger compartment lighting is switched on
and off automatically in accordance with the
below.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
• the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade.
• the engine is stopped and the remote control key is turned to position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
• the engine is started
• the car is locked with the key or remote
control key.
110
Passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors
is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after 5 minutes.
04 Interior
Interior lighting
04
111
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
04
112
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage compartment in door panel.
Glovebox
Coat hanger
Storage pocket on front edge of front seat
cushions (trim dependent).
Ticket clip
Coat hanger, only for light garments.
Glovebox
Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs
and cup holder,*) and storage compartment behind the centre console.
04
Storage compartments in rear side panels
with space for up to three soda cans.
Storage compartment for first aid.
Storage pockets for maps and magazines.
WARNING
Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects
lie or protrude in such a way that they could
cause injury during heavy braking.
G024208
Bottle holder*
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
coins, pens and fuel cards.
The coat hanger is located on the passenger
seat head restraint. Only hang light garments
on the hanger.
The glovebox can be locked with the remote
control key's detachable key blade. Further
information is available on page 125.
Always secure large and heavy objects with
a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage under the front armrest
Cup holder in centre console
There is a storage space under the armrest.
There is also a smaller storage space in the
detachable armrest. Press the small button
and lift the armrest to open the shallow compartment. Press the large button and lift the
armrest to open the deeper compartment.
In the deeper compartment there is space for
10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored
vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have
space.
G018372
G026704
G018371
04
There is space for a double cup holder under
the roller cover. The space can be used for
storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the
rear edge of the cup holder where there is a
recess.
If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its
two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front
edge of the space and then press down the
rear edge of the cup holder.
Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge
from below and pulling forward.
114
04 Interior
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
Storage compartment behind the gear
lever
Bottle holder*
Ashtray*
When there are no buttons for parking assistance and BLIS, see page 169 and page 171,
the space can be used as a storage compartment.
A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on
the rear of the tunnel console.
G019622
G017441
04
An ashtray is located towards the rear of the
tunnel console.
Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the
cover.
Emptying the ashtray:
WARNING
Objects placed in the storage compartments must not obstruct the parking brake
lever when it is applied.
1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustration, and tilt the cover up.
2. Then lift the ashtray out.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
04 Interior
Rear seat
Head restraint, rear
Lowering the rear seat backrest
shows that the backrest is no longer locked
in place.
IMPORTANT
2. Fold the backrest forward.
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either.
Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the
rear seat upholstery.
Raising the backrest
1. Fold up the backrest.
2. Place the seatbelt over the backrest.
3. Press the backrest backwards into locked
position.
4. Check that the backrest is locked.
04
The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards
together, or individually, to make it easier to
transport long objects.
Lowering the backrest
1. Pull the lock catch up and forward to
release the backrest. A red indicator (A)
116
G007608
To lower the head restraint, press the button by
the right-hand pillar at the same time as pushing down the head restraint. To remove the
head restraint, the button by the right-hand pillar must be pressed while lifting out the head
restraint.
G009109
All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to
suit the height of the passenger. The upper
edge of the head restraint should be aligned
with middle of the back of the head. Raise the
head restraint as necessary.
04 Interior
Rear seat
long load. The armrest folds down when one of
the backrests is folded down.
WARNING
Place the belt straps over the backrests
before folding them back to their secured
positions.
For securing loads, see page 187.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator (A) should no longer be showing. If
it is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
04
G009152
Armrest in the rear seat
The armrest in the rear seat can be folded down
for passenger comfort or to make space for a
117
04 Interior
Cargo area
Soft cargo cover*
Hanging up the cargo cover when not in
use
Hard cargo cover*
1. Unhook the hooks from the rear load
retaining eyelets (D).
2. Press the rail together and remove it from
the rear bracket (C). Place the rail at the
front of the cargo area floor.
3. Hook in the hooks in the rail next to the
mounting points (B).
Soft cargo cover.
The cargo cover is pulled over the luggage and
secured in the rear load retaining eyelets. Undo
(D) and if necessary (C) during loading.
Attaching the cargo cover
1. Hook in the hooks in the front load retaining
eyelets by the floor (A).
2. Fit the front brackets in (B) by pressing
together the spring-loaded rail and fit it into
place on both sides.
3. Fit the rear brackets in (C) in the same way.
The cargo cover now hangs next to the rear
seat backrest ready for the next time it is to be
used.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Unhook the hooks and remove one rail at
a time by pressing them together and
removing them from their mounting points.
2. When all mounting points are detached the
cargo cover can be rolled up and placed at
the rear of the cargo area floor to make
space for bulky loads.
NOTE
The cargo cover has no load-securing function. Never load anything on top of the cargo
cover. For securing loads, see page 187.
4. Hook in the hooks in the rear load retaining
eyelets (D).
118
G009475
G007614
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Attaching the cargo cover
1. Retract all four lock plungers by pulling the
lock buttons to their end positions before
lifting in the cargo cover into the cargo
area. The lock plungers stop in retracted
position.
2. Lift the cargo cover carefully into the cargo
area sideways, turn it back around and
angle the front edge up slightly.
04 Interior
Cargo area
The cargo cover hatch can be raised during
loading.
Raising the floor hatch
NOTE
The cargo cover has no load-securing function. Never load anything on top of the cargo
cover. For securing loads, see page 187.
Locks and support pins.
3. Locate the front section of the two support
pins behind the active locks (A) on both
sides.
4. Align one of the rear locks at (B) and extend
the lock plunger by moving the lock button
forwards.
5. Align the other rear lock in the same way
and extend the lock plunger by moving the
lock button forwards.
1. Retract the front lock plungers at (A) to their
end positions by pulling back the lock buttons on both sides.
04
G014316
G007611
Removing the cargo cover
2. Retract the rear lock plungers at (B) to their
end positions by pulling back the lock buttons on both sides.
3. Lift up and turn the cargo cover before lifting it from the cargo area.
Without cargo cover
Raise the floor hatch and secure it in the lugs
on both sides.
With hard cargo cover
Raise the hatch on the cargo cover. Then raise
the floor hatch and hook it into the hook
located under the cargo cover.
6. Extend the front lock plungers, one at a
time so that they lock in their active locks
(A).
119
04 Interior
Cargo area
Safety net*
Removing the safety net
Load retaining eyelets*
1. Slacken the tension from the straps.
2. Undo the hooks from the eyes at the seatbelt floor mounting on both sides.
3. Detach the net from the mounting points in
the roof panels.
4. Fold up the safety net and store it in the
bag.
WARNING
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
The safety net is located behind the front seat
backrests. The safety net is only designed for
use when the rear seat backrests are lowered.
For securing loads, see page 187.
Attaching the safety net
1. Fold down the backrests on both sides,
see page 116.
2. Secure the safety net in the roof panel
mountings.
3. Secure the hooks in the eyes at the seatbelt
floor mounting on both sides.
4. Stretch the straps if necessary.
5. Check all mountings.
120
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G007602
G007603
04
The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten
straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo
area.
There are two further eyelets on each side by
the seatbelt slide rail that can be used when
securing loads when the safety net is not in
use.
For securing loads, see page 187.
04 Interior
04
121
Remote control key with key blade.......................................................
Active locks...........................................................................................
Keyless drive*........................................................................................
Battery in remote control key................................................................
Locking and unlocking..........................................................................
Alarm*....................................................................................................
122
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
124
127
128
131
132
135
LOCKS AND ALARM
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Remote control key
Loss of a remote control key
The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.
If you lose a remote control key, take the car
and the other remote control keys to a Volvo
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The code of the missing
remote control key must be erased from the
system as a theft prevention measure.
The key blades' unique code is available at
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended for ordering new key blades.
A maximum of 6 remote control keys/key
blades can be programmed and used for one
single car.
05
Turn signal indication during locking/
unlocking
When the car is unlocked using the remote
control key or Keyless drive system, two short
flashes of the direction indicators serve to indicate that unlocking was correctly performed.
For locking, the indication takes place with one
long flash and only if all locks are locked, after
the doors and the tailgate have been closed.
Personal preferences in the menu system can
be used to the deactivate indication via the
direction indicators. There will then be no visual
indication as to whether the lock status is correct, see page 81.
124
Immobiliser
The remote control keys are fitted with coded
chips. The code must be accepted by the
reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The
engine can only be started if the correct remote
control key with the correct code is used.
G019402
The remote control keys contain detachable
metal key blades for mechanical locking/
unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.
Remote control key functions
Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close the side windows and the sunroof.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that no one is
in danger of getting hands caught.
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and the
tailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds)
to also open the side windows.
Approach lighting – Switches on the lighting at a distance – lights up the area around
a car parked in a dark location. Press the
button once to switch on the interior lighting, position/parking lamps, number plate
lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The
lighting is switched off automatically after
30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on
setting the delay time, see page 81.
• the driver's door can be opened manually
IMPORTANT
The narrow section of the remote control
key is particularly sensitive - this contains
the chip. The engine cannot be started if the
chip is damaged.
• access to the glovebox can be blocked,
see page 126.
• PACOS* activated/deactivated, see
page 22.
Detachable key blade
Removing the key blade
To remove the key blade from the remote control key:
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
Tailgate – Press the button once to unlock
the tailgate only1.
Pull out the key blade at the same time.
Attaching the key blade
05
Be careful when inserting the key blade into the
remote control key.
G019403
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the red
button for at least 3 seconds or press it
twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn. The
alarm can be deactivated with the same
button, after having been armed for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function
switches off automatically after 30 seconds.
if central locking cannot be activated with
the remote control key, see page 129.
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
1. Hold the remote control key with the narrow end pointing down and lower the key
blade into its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in
position. You should hear a "click".
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be
unlocked and opened as follows:
1
The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
125
05 Locks and alarm
Remote control key with key blade
1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door
keyhole.
2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and
open the door.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable key
blade. (For information on the key blade, see
page 125.)
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.
See also the figure and further information on
page 129.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 136.
05
Pull out the key blade.
–
Unlocking takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
The remote control key cannot unlock the
glovebox without the key blade.
Locking the glovebox
G020034
This function is particularly useful for when
the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.
The glovebox is locked.
126
05 Locks and alarm
G019405
Active locks
Active locks for remote control key with
key blade.
05
Active locks for remote control key without key blade.
127
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Keyless lock and ignition system
Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the
car
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remote
control key must be no more than approx.
1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.
This means that the person who wishes to
open a door must have the remote control key
with him or her. It is not possible to open a door
if the remote control key is on the other side of
the car.
G007577
The grey area in the illustration indicates the
range covered by the system's antennas.
05
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key. You simply need to have the remote
control key with you in a pocket or a bag.
The system makes it easier and more convenient to open the car, for example with shopping
bags in one hand and a child in the other. It
saves you having to take out or look for the
remote control key.
The two remote control keys incorporate the
keyless drive function. You can order additional remote controls. The keyless drive system can handle up to six remote controls.
If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless
drive remote control key with them, a warning
message appears on the information display
and a reminder signal sounds. The warning
message disappears when the remote control
key is brought back to the car or when the ignition dial is turned to position 0. The warning is
only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or
II after someone has opened and closed a
door.
The warning message and reminder signal disappear when the remote control key is brought
back to the car after one of the following
actions:
• a door has been opened and closed
• the ignition dial has been turned to position
0
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
• the READ button has been pressed.
Never leave any remote control key in the
car
If a remote control key with keyless drive function is left in the car, it is made passive when
the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised
entry.
If someone breaks into the car and finds the
remote control key, it can be activated and
used again. It is therefore important to handle
all remote control keys with equal care.
Interference to remote control key
function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the remote control key
near a mobile phone or metal object - no
closer than 10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and key blade in the
normal way, see page 124.
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Locking
Unlocking doors with the key blade
NOTE
On cars with the keyless drive system and
automatic transmission the gear selector
must be moved to the P position and the
ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Otherwise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.
Unlocking
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the
outside door handles.
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas, the doors
and the tailgate are locked as follows:
–
Push in the lock button on one of the door
handles.
All doors must be closed before the lock button
is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.
When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the
inside of the doors retract.
1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant handle.
G020225
G020033
When the remote control key is within the range
covered by the system's antennas:
2. Open the tailgate by pressing under the
tailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.
05
If for some reason the keyless drive function in
the remote control key is not operating, the car
can be unlocked using the remote control key
functions, see page 124.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be opened
as follows:
Power seat – remote control key with
memory function
1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out
the plastic cover in the handle by inserting
the key blade in the hole on the bottom of
the cover.
If several people with keyless drive remote
control keys get into the car, then the driver's
seat will be adjusted for the person who opens
the door first.
2. Unlock the door using the key blade.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
05 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Centre console, under the rear section
NOTE
Door handle, right-hand rear
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch, see
page 136.
Centre console, under the front section
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
Antenna location
Personal preferences
The Keyless Drive system can have personal
preferences applied, see page 81.
G020075
05
The keyless system has a number of integrated
antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, inside centre
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, left
130
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Locks and alarm
Battery in remote control key
Low battery in remote control key
When the battery runs down and full functionality cannot be guaranteed, the information
and display show KEY BATTERY
symbol
LOW VOLTAGE or REMOTE BATTERY
LOW VOLTAGE.
Changing the remote control key
battery
1. Place the remote control key with the keypad downward and prize up the cover
using a small screwdriver.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and
(–) sides are fitted (there is a diagram under
the cover).
4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid
touching the battery and its terminals with
your fingers.
5. Refit the cover and press it in.
> Dispose of the old battery in an environmentally-responsible manner.
G019406
05
If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals
from the remote control key at a normal distance, the battery should be replaced
(type CR 2450, 3 V).
131
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Locking/unlocking the car from
outside
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
on.
For cars with the Keyless system, see
page 128.
Unlocking
Using the remote control key's unlock button
the car can be unlocked in two different ways
(select in personal settings, see page 81):
gate
•
05
One press unlocks the driver's door and a
second press unlocks the other doors and
the tailgate.
Locking
The remote control key's lock button locks the
doors and tailgate simultaneously.
NOTE
The car can be locked even if the tailgate is
open - when the tailgate is then closed there
is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.
Rapid closing
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically (does not apply to locking
from inside). This function reduces the risk that
the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For
cars with alarm, see page 136.)
Locking/unlocking the car from inside
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on the
remote control key's lock button to close all
windows and sunroof* at the same time.
Tailgate
Unlocking
Unlocking tailgate only:
–
Press the remote control key's button to
unlock the tailgate.
G007451
• One press unlocks the doors and the tail-
Automatic relocking
Locking
If the doors are locked when the tailgate is
closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the
remote control key's lock button or from inside
with the central locking button in order to lock
both doors and the tailgate.
With the central locking button on the driver's
door, the doors and tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously.
Unlocking
–
132
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the upper section of the central locking button
.
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Global opening
Automatic locking
–
Press the upper section of the central lock.
ing button
When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the
doors and tailgate are locked automatically.
A long press (at least 4 seconds) also
opens all the side windows simultaneously
- for example, to quickly ventilate the passenger compartment during hot weather.
When the function is activated and the doors
have been locked they can be opened in two
ways:
Locking
–
Press the lower section of the central locking button
.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all windows and the sunroof* at the
same time.
Opening the doors
When the doors are locked from the inside:
–
Pull the handle twice to unlock and open
the door.
WARNING
• Pull one of the door handles twice
• Press the upper section of the central locking button
and pull the door handle.
The function can be activated/deactivated by
means of personal preferences, see page 81.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off.
Deadlocks*1
When deadlocked, the doors cannot be
opened from the inside if they are locked with
the remote control key.
05
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after a 10-25 second
delay after the doors have been locked.
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock
state with the remote control key. The driver's
door can also be unlocked manually with the
remote control key's detachable key blade see page 125.
1
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
133
05 Locks and alarm
Locking and unlocking
Deactivation is carried out as follows:
1. Access the menu system under CAR
SETTINGS (for a detailed description of
the menu system, see page 81).
2. Select REDUCED GUARD.
3. Select Activate once: The instrument
panel display shows the message
REDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL and
the deadlocks function is switched off
when the car is locked.
or
Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is
turned to position 0 the audio system display shows the message Reduced guard
ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce
guard until engine is started Press EXIT
to cancel - select one of the options:
05
NOTE
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
Display
MENU
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
EXIT
ENTER
• If the deadlocks function shall be switched
Navigation
134
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Note
that the alarm's* movement and tilt detectors are switched off at the same time, see
page 136.
The next time the remote control key is turned
to key position II the system is reset to zero and
the instrument panel display shows the message FULL GUARD at which the deadlocks
function and the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors* are re-engaged.
or
• If the locking system shall not be changed:
Select no options at all and lock the car. Or
press EXIT and lock the car.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Alarm system
Alarm indicator
NOTE
When the alarm is armed, it continually monitors all alarm inputs.
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
The alarm is triggered if:
• a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens
• a non-approved key is used in the ignition
Arming the alarm
–
or if an attempt is made to force the lock
• a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector)
• the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
IMPORTANT
G020227
with a tilt detector)
• the battery's cable is disconnected
• anyone tries to disconnect the siren
• the rear window is broken.
The alarm is fully armed when the car's
direction indicators have made one long
flash and the LED on the instrument panel
flashes once every other second.
A red LED on the top of the instrument panel
indicates the alarm system's status:
• LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.
• The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed.
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm and until key position II is activated
– the alarm has been triggered.
Press the remote control key lock button.
A long flash from the car's direction indicators confirms that the alarm is armed
and that the doors are locked.
05
Disarming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button. Two short flashes from the car's direction indicators confirm that the alarm is
disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.
If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message
appears on the display. At which point you
should contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
135
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
Remote control key not working
Alarm signals
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
When the alarm is triggered, the following happens:
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
• A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until the
alarm is deactivated. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
• The direction indicators flash for
5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
05
Reduced alarm level
Press the unlock button on the remote
control key or insert the key in the ignition
switch.
Confirmation is given by two short flashes from
the direction indicators.
If the remote control key's batteries are discharged then the alarm can be deactivated by
unlocking the driver's door manually, inserting
the remote control key in the ignition switch
and turning it to key position II.
G019420
–
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade. The alarm is triggered and the
siren sounds.
2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First
remove the knob by pressing in the
catch (1) and pulling out (2).
3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The
alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote
control key is turned to key position II.
136
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - the movement and tilt detectors should be temporarily
deactivated.
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 133
Testing the alarm system
Testing the movement detector* in the
passenger compartment
1. Open all the windows.
2. Engage the alarm function with the remote
control key's lock button. Active alarm
function is confirmed with a slowly flashing
alarm indicator.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
05 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
4. Test the movement detector by lifting out
a bag from a seat for example.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the
dashboard.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for doors
1. Engage the alarm function with the remote
control key's lock button.
2. Please wait 30 seconds.
3. Unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade.
4. Open one of the doors.
> A siren should sound and all direction
indicators should flash.
05
5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car
with the remote control key.
Test of alarm for bonnet
1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement
detector, see the previous section
"Reduced alarm level".
2. Remain sitting in the car and engage the
alarm function with the remote control
key's lock button.
3. Please wait 30 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
137
General..................................................................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Alcolock*...............................................................................................
Starting the engine................................................................................
Starting the engine – Flexifuel...............................................................
Keyless drive*........................................................................................
Manual gearbox....................................................................................
Automatic gearbox................................................................................
DRIVe Start-Stop*.................................................................................
Brake system........................................................................................
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*......................................
Park Assist*...........................................................................................
BLIS*.....................................................................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
Start assistance....................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing equipment*...............................................................................
Detachable towbar* .............................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Adjusting headlamp pattern..................................................................
138
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
140
142
146
150
152
154
155
156
161
165
167
169
171
174
178
179
181
183
187
188
STARTING AND DRIVING
06 Starting and driving
General
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving
style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
• Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel
consumption.
• Avoid driving with open windows.
• Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
• Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 13 and 296.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving in water
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of
10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
• Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
06
• A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher fuel consumption
- remove the load carriers when not in use.
• Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
• Cars with the D2 engine and 6-speed manual transmission with Start/Stop* are
started in 2nd gear under normal conditions on level ground.
140
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
• Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
IMPORTANT
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time. This could
cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of stalling in water, do not try to
restart. Tow the car from the water.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
In greater depths, water can enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability
of the oils and shortens the service life of the
systems.
For supplementary information about overheating when driving with a trailer - see
page 179.
IMPORTANT
• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
When driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
• In the event of a risk of overheating a builtin protection function in the gearbox is activated which, amongst other things, illuminates the instrument panel's yellow information lamp and there is a text message
06 Starting and driving
General
displayed there regarding appropriate
action - follow the recommendation given.
• If the temperature gauge for the engine's
cooling system goes into the red zone stop and let the engine idle for a few
minutes.
• If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
• Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
one of a greater capacity than the standard
model1. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer
regarding the options for your car.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has been
switched off.
IMPORTANT
The operating temperature of the gearbox is
checked in order to prevent damage to any
of the drive system's components. In the
event of a risk of overheating a warning
symbol illuminates on the instrument panel
combined with a text message - In which
case, follow the recommendation given.
Diesel engine
When driving under heavy load in a hot climate,
the engine cooling fan can be replaced with
1
Do not overload the battery
The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees. Avoid having the
remote control key in key position II when the
engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode
- which uses less power.
Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area
supplies power even when the remote control
key has been removed from the ignition switch.
• audio system (high volume)
• headlamps.
If the battery voltage is low the information display shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER
SAVE MODE. The energy-saving function
then shuts down certain functions or reduces
certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
–
In which case, charge the battery by starting the engine and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - battery charging is more
effective during driving than running the
engine at idling speed while stationary.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
06
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions
which use a lot of power when the engine is
switched off. Examples of such functions are:
• ventilation fan
• windscreen wiper
For certain engines.
141
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
Opening the fuel filler flap
3. Take out the cap.
4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
NOTE
Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.
Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater
before refuelling!
06
Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the
lighting panel, see page 57. The engine must
be switched off before the flap can be opened.
The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.
Closing
Push in the flap until you hear a click.
Fuel cap
1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resistance is felt.
2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a
stop.
142
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Fuel of a lower quality than that specified
should not be used as engine power and fuel
consumption could be negatively affected, for
more information see the following section
Fuel.
General information on fuel
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel
are highly toxic and could cause permanent
injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical
attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills on to the ground can be
ignited by the exhaust fumes.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could cause
spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,
leading to fire and injury.
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines
that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).
For information on fuel consumption, CO2
emissions and tank volume - see page 296.
Catalytic converter
The purpose of the catalytic converter is to
purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of
exhaust gases close to the engine so that it
quickly reaches operating temperature. The
catalytic converter consists of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,
i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel
to air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal
conditions for efficient combustion of harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide
and nitrous oxides) using the three-way catalytic converter.
Petrol
Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most
engines can be run with octane ratings of 91,
95 and 98 RON.
• 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder
engines and should only be used in exceptional cases with other engines.
• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.
• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that con-
WARNING
Methanol must not be used. A decal on the
inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct
alternative fuel.
The use of components not designed for
bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury
or engine damage.
Reserve fuel can
The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,
see the NOTE box, page 152.
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,
fuel with the highest possible octane rating is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy.
Bioethanol E85
Do not modify the fuel system or its components, and do not replace components with
parts that are not specifically designed for use
with bioethanol.
IMPORTANT
•
Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as
not to damage the catalytic converter.
•
Do not use additives not recommended
by Volvo.
IMPORTANT
06
Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely
fastened and that its cap is sealed.
WARNING
Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive
gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it
is refuelled with ethanol.
143
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
Diesel
Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels which must not be used:
special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel
oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable
oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements
in accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
06
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,
such as excessively high volumes of sulphur
particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from
well-known producers. Never use diesel of
dubious quality.
At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which
may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel
fuel designed for low temperatures around
freezing point is available from the major oil
1
144
companies. This fuel is less viscous at low temperatures and reduces the risk of paraffin precipitate.
IMPORTANT
Use special winter grade fuel during cold
months.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
The sulphur content must be a maximum of
50 ppm.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine
means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
tank may need to be vented in the workshop in
order to restart the engine after fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments
to carry out a check. Do this before starting the
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and turn to key position II (see
page 150).
2. Wait approx. 1 minute.
3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/
or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control
key to start position III.
Draining condensation from the fuel filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle filter, which results in more efficient emission
control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving. So-
06 Starting and driving
Refuelling
called "regeneration" is started in order to burn
away the particles and empty the filter. This
requires the engine to have reached normal
operating temperature.
Regeneration of the filter takes place automatically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel
consumption may increase slightly during
regeneration.
The rear window heating may be activated
automatically to increase the load on the
engine during regeneration without warning.
NOTE
A smaller reduction of engine power may be
noticed temporarily during regeneration.
When regeneration is complete the message is
cleared automatically.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up it may be incapable of
functioning. Then it can be difficult to start
the engine and there is a risk that the filter
will have to be replaced.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does
not take place and the filter is not emptied.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that
the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
06
When the filter has become
approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow
information symbol on the instrument panel
illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER
FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on the
instrument panel display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motorway. The car should then be driven for approximately 20 minutes more.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
145
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
General information on the Alcolock
Functions
The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Operation
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
Indicator lamp
(4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the
charger in the holder
or connect the
power supply cable
from the glovebox.
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt
the driver from responsibility. It is always the
responsibility of the driver to be sober and
to drive the car safely.
1. Nozzle for breath test.
2. Switch.
3. Transmission button.
06
4. Lamp for battery status.
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
1
146
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
Storage
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
Result after breath test
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in which
case, press the button (3) to transmit the
result to the car manually.
Handset storage and charging station.
• To detach the Alcolock handset, press it
gently into its holder and then release - it
then springs out and can be removed from
the holder.
Indicator lamp
(5) + Display text
Specification
Green lamp +
ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Start the engine - no
alcohol content
measured.
Yellow lamp +
ALCOGUARD
APPROVED TEST
Engine starting possible - measured
alcohol content is
above 0.1 promille
but below the limit
value in forceA.
Red lamp + DISAPPROVED TEST
WAIT 1 MINUTE
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value
in forceA.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock
in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
• Replace the handset in the holder by sliding it in until it "clicks" into place.
•
A
Store the handset in the holder - this provides best protection and its batteries are
kept fully charged.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
06
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.
See also the section entitled General information on the
Alcolock on page 146.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
147
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible:
• Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
• Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an
incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
06
Bypass function will then be possible, see
page 148 section Emergency situation.
In extremely cold weather the heating time can
be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on
its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reappears each time the engine is started - only
recalibration at a workshop2 can clear the message permanently.
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypass
the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
Temperature (ºC)
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
display shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.
REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried out
within these 30 days then normal engine starting will be blocked - only starting with the
2
148
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The display shows ALCOGUARD
INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, connect the power supply cable from the glovebox
and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Emergency situation
NOTE
All Bypass activation is logged and saved in
memory, see page 10 in the section,
Recording data.
After the Bypass function has been activated
the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED the whole time while driving and
can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without the
error message being logged - in which case,
carry out all the steps without starting the car.
The error message is cleared when the car is
locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
06 Starting and driving
Alcolock*
Activating the Bypass function
Symbols and display messages
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
Display text
Meaning/Action
In addition to the previously described messages, the combined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
ALCOGUARD
BLOW HARDER
Blowing too weak blow harder.
ALCOGUARD
WAIT PREHEATING
Heating not finished
- wait for text
ALCOGUARD
BLOW 5 SECONDS.
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows
BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE
and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS
ENABLED - after which the engine can be
started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Display text
Meaning/Action
ALCOGUARD
RESTART POSSIBLE
The engine has been
switched off for less
than 30 minutes engine starting possible without new
test.
ALCOGUARD
SERVICE
REQUIRED
Contact a workshop2.
ALCOGUARD NO
SIGNAL
Transmission failed send manually with
button (3) or take a
new breath test.
Activating the Emergency function
• Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch READ button and the button for
hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the display shows
ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and
the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
2
ALCOGUARD
INVALID TEST
Test failed - take a
new breath test.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW LONGER
Blowing too short blow for longer.
ALCOGUARD
BLOW SOFTER
Blowing too hard blow more gently.
06
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
149
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine
–
NOTE
Apply the parking brake.
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects
the environment.
Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock
then a breath test must first be approved
before the engine can be started, see
page 146.
Automatic gearbox
–
Starting the engine
Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch
pedal fully depressed. This is particularly
important in very cold conditions.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
06
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock could
otherwise be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.
With the autostart function, there is no need to
hold the remote control key (or ignition dial, on
cars with Keyless Drive - see page 128) in key
position III until the engine has started.
Turn the key to key position III and release
it - the starter motor then works automatically until the engine has started.
NOTE
If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold
without waiting for engine preheating, then
the automatic start sequence can be
delayed for a couple of seconds.
Petrol
–
The remote control key must be in key position II when the car is being towed.
Turn the remote control key to key position
III. If the engine does not start within
5–10 seconds, release the key and try
again.
Diesel
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
II.
> An indicator symbol in the combined
instrument panel shows that engine preheating is underway, see page 49.
150
Autostart *
–
Move the gear selector in position P or N.
Manual gearbox
2. Turn the ignition key to position III when
the indicator symbol goes out.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Key positions
0 – Locked position
The steering lock is activated
when the remote control key
is removed from the ignition
switch.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine
I – Radio position
Steering lock deactivated.
Certain functions can be
used. The engine's electrical
system is not activated.
II – Driving position
The remote control key's
position when driving. The
whole electrical system is
engaged.
and the car cannot be started. In which case,
proceed as follows:
Remote control keys and electronic
immobiliser
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch and turn the steering wheel
so that the tension is released.
The remote control key must not hang with
other keys or metal objects on the same key
ring. The electronic immobiliser could be activated accidentally.
2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
Reinsert the key and make a new attempt
to start the car.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch while driving or when the
car is being towed. The steering lock would
be activated, making it impossible to steer
the car.
III – Start position
The starter motor is activated.
The remote control key is
released when the engine has
started and then springs back
to drive position.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car,
especially if there are children in the car.
06
A ticking sound can be heard
if the key reaches an intermediate position - in
which case, turn the key to position II and back
to get rid of the sound.
When the steering lock is activated
If the front wheels are positioned so that there
is tension in the steering lock then the information display may show a warning message
151
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
General information about starting
with Flexifuel
If the engine still does not start
–
Please wait for one minute, fully depress
the accelerator pedal and repeat the previous procedure.
The engine is started in the same way as in a
petrol-engined car, see page 150.
IMPORTANT
NOTE
The immobiliser is activated in the event of
repeated start attempts. Before a new start
attempt is made the key/dial must first be
turned back to position I or 0.
In the event of starting difficulties
If the engine does not start despite repeated
start attempts, contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Engine block heater*
If the engine does not start at the first start
attempt, proceed as follows:
3. When the engine has started, ease the
accelerator pedal gradually as the engine
speed increases.
If the engine has not started after
10 seconds, second attempt
Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III until the engine starts, but
not longer than 60 seconds.
Electrical input to the engine block heater.
When the temperature is expected to be lower
than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with
152
Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine
block heater*. Starting and driving with a preheated engine involves significantly lower
emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For
this reason you should aim to use the engine
block heater throughout the winter months.
The engine block heater is powered by high
voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an electric engine block heater and its electrical
connections must only be carried out by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to
key position III.
–
The lower the temperature, the longer the time
required with the engine block heater. At
-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3
hours.
WARNING
1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.
06
bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should
be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick
starting of the engine.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Starting the engine – Flexifuel
NOTE
Points to remember for carrying reserve
fuel:
•
In the event of stalling due to an empty
fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve
fuel can may make the engine difficult
to start in extreme cold. This is avoided
by filling the reserve fuel can with 95
octane petrol.
IMPORTANT
After the fuel mixture in the tank has been
changed an adaptation should be made by
driving at an even speed for about 15
minutes.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then a slightly longer period of driving
is required for the adaptation as the memory
for the electronics has been cleared.
For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol
E85 fuel, see page 143.
Fuel adaptation
If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car
has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice
versa) then the engine may run slightly
unevenly for a time. For this reason it is important to allow the engine to accustom itself
(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.
06
Adaptation takes place automatically when the
car is driven for a short period at an even
speed.
153
06 Starting and driving
Keyless drive*
General
Starting the car
–
Starting with the remote control key
Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual
gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with automatic gearbox).
Petrol engine
–
Press in and turn the ignition dial to key
position III.
1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II
and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in
the combined instrument panel goes out,
see page 49.
2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to
position III.
The keyless drive system allows the car to be
unlocked, driven and locked without the need
for a key, see page 128.
06
G019420
G019410
Diesel engine
The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the
same way as the remote control key. One precondition for starting the car is that the car's
remote control key is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.
If the remote control key's battery is discharged then the Keyless Drive function does
not work. In which case, start the car by using
the remote control key as ignition dial.
1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.
2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition
switch.
3. Insert the remote control key into the ignition switch and start in the same way as
with the ignition dial.
154
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Manual gearbox
Gear positions
Gear shift indicator - GSI*
GSI - Gear Shift Indicator advises the driver of the optimum time to change gear.
The indication is given with an
arrow for up and down shifting respectively in the lower
information display of the
combined instrument panel, see page 47.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse
gear during normal forward travel.
• Start from neutral position N and only
Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.
Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.
The 6-speed box is available in two versions reverse gear position differs between them.
Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted
on the gear lever.
• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
• Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
engage reverse gear R when the car is stationary.
NOTE
With the upper variant of the shifting pattern
for 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustration) - first press down the gear lever in the
N position in order to engage reverse gear.
06
gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not
sufficient to hold the car in all situation.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Geartronic automatic gear positions
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order
to be able to disengage the gear lever from
the P position.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Always apply the
parking brake when parking the car.
G018264
WARNING
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear
positions.
06
The information display shows the position of
the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see
page 47.
P – Parking position
Select position P when you wish to start the
engine or park the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
156
Always apply the parking brake when parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the
car in all situation.
R – Reverse
The car must be stationary when position R is
selected.
N – Neutral
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake when the car
is stationary with the gear selector in position N.
D – Drive
D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts up and down depending on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must
be stationary when the gear selector is moved
to position D from position R.
Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)
The driver can also change gear manually
using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The
car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal
is released.
Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving
the lever to the side from position D to the end
position at +/–. The information display shifts
the indication from D to one of the figures 1 –
6, which is equivalent to the gear that is
engaged just then, see page 47.
• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)
to change up a gear and release it, the lever
returns to its rest position between + and
–.
or
• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to
NOTE
The brake pedal must be depressed in order
to be able to disengage the gear lever from
the N position if the car has been stationary
for more than 3 seconds.
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower than
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
a level suitable for the selected gear, in order
to avoid jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-
Cars with an automatic gearbox have special
safety systems:
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
To remove the remote control key, the gear
selector must be in the P position. The key is
locked in all other positions.
tion at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
Stationary car with engine running:
–
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed
high enough to damage the engine. Nothing
happens if the driver still tries to shift down in
this way at high engine speed – the original
gear remains engaged.
Hold your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P position)
G020237
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox
control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor which prevents the kick-down function.
Keylock
Parking position (P)
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
Safety function
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending
on engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with the
inhibitor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards between
P, R, N and D.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
P position to other gear positions, the remote
control key must be in position II and the brake
pedal must be depressed.
06
Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least three seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked in the N
position.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
N position to another gear position, the brake
pedal must be depressed and the remote control key must be in position II.
``
157
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
Cold start
Automatic gearbox Powershift*
When starting in low temperatures, the gear
changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due
to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low temperatures. To reduce engine emissions, the gearbox shifts up later than normal when the engine
is started at low temperatures.
06
Depending on the engine temperature when
the engine is started, the idle speed after a
cold start may be higher than normal for
certain engine types.
In certain cases, it may be necessary to move
the car when it is not driveable, for example if
the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move
the car:
1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on
the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear
edge.
2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote
control key.
3. Hold the key blade down and at the same
time move the gear lever out of the P position.
158
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
G018264
G018263
NOTE
D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gear
positions.
Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox
that has double mechanical clutch discs in
contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.
A conventional automatic gearbox has a
hydraulic torque converter instead that transfers power from engine to gearbox.
Powershift transmission operates in the same
way and has similar controls and functions as
the Geartronic automatic transmission, described in the previous section.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the des-
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
ignation on the decal number (5) under the
bonnet - see page 284. The designation ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatic
transmission.
To bear in mind
The transmission's double clutch has overload
protection that is activated if it becomes too
hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the
accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a
long time.
Overheated transmission causes the car to
shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illuminates and the information display shows a
message. The transmission can also overheat
during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or
slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer
hitched. The transmission cools down when
the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed
and the engine running at idling speed.
Overheating during slow driving in queues can
be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car
and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until
there is a moderate distance to the traffic
ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then
wait another moment with your foot on the
brake pedal.
IMPORTANT
For important information regarding Powershift
transmission and towing - see page 174.
Text message and action
In some situations the display can show a message at the same time as a symbol is illuminated.
The table shows three steps with an increased
degree of seriousness should the gearbox
become too hot. In parallel with the display text
the driver is also advised that the car's electronics are temporarily changing the driving
characteristics. Follow the instructions on the
information display where appropriate.
Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary
on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car
with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox
could then overheat.
06
159
06 Starting and driving
Automatic gearbox
Symbol
A
06
Display
Driving characteristics
Action
TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO
HOLD
Difficulty in maintaining even speed at constant engine speed.
Gearbox overheated. Keep the car stationary using the foot brakeA.
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY
Significant pulling in the car's traction.
Gearbox overheated. Park the car immediately in a safe manner.
TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN
No drive due to overheated gearbox.
Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:
Run the engine at idling speed with the gear
lever in the N or P position until the message clears.
For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.
NOTE
The table's examples are no indication that
the car is defective but instead show that a
safety function has been activated intentionally to prevent damage to one of the
car's components.
160
WARNING
If a warning symbol combined with the text
TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY is
ignored then the heat in the gearbox may
become so high that the power transmission between engine and gearbox is temporarily halted in order to prevent the clutch
from malfunctioning - the car then loses
drive and is stationary until gearbox temperature has cooled to an acceptable level.
For more possible display messages with their
respective proposals for solutions concerning
automatic transmission, see page 52.
A display text clears automatically after the
action has been carried out or after one press
on the indicator stalk READ button.
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
General
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
conscious driving style by means of being able
to disengage gear and letting the engine autostop, whenever appropriate.
Start/Stop
Quieter and cleaner
Smart charging
The car's kinetic energy is used during engine
braking by means of it being converted into
electricity and stored in the car's battery.
Adapted power steering
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which guides all our activities. This target orientation has resulted in the
vehicle series DRIVe, the concept of which
involves the interaction of several separate
energy-saving functions, with the collective
task of reducing fuel consumption, which in
turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
In addition to being equipped with a reliable
and fuel-efficient diesel engine, this car's
engine is equipped with a Start and Stop function which comes into action in the event of e.g.
stationary traffic queues or waiting at traffic
lights - see the detailed description on the next
page.
The engine's automatic restart sequence runs
so smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that the
engine has actually been switched off. The
experience is that the engine has been running
the whole time but with an extremely quiet and
low idling speed.
1
Another DRIVe function is that the power steering's energy take-off is adapted according to
requirements. By means of optimisation and
the introduction of an energy saving function
the energy take-off can be minimised on occasions where power assistance (help in turning
the steering wheel) is not necessary.
Aerodynamics
06
The DRIVe concept also includes a lowered
chassis, front and rear spoilers with low wind
resistance, as well as specially developed
wheel rims1.
The range varies depending on the market.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
Function and operation
Engine auto-start
NOTE
After starting with the key and each autostop the car must first reach 5 km/h before
the automatic Start/Stop function is re-activated - following which certain conditions
must also be fulfilled, refer to these under
the heading "The engine does not autostop".
All the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio etc. work normally even when the engine
has been stopped automatically, except that
some equipment may have its function temporarily reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed or
extremely high audio system volume.
On/Off button and display text AUTO STARTSTOP ON.
06
The Start/Stop system is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.
The driver is made aware of this function by
means of the On/Off button's green lamp being
illuminated.
Engine auto-stop
In order for the engine to stop automatically the
car must be stationary - however, the
Start/Stop function does accept slow rolling,
the equivalent to normal walking pace:
• Set the gear lever in neutral position and
release the clutch pedal - the engine stops
automatically.
The display text ENGINE IN
AUTO START, and the button's illuminated green lamp,
reminds - and indicates - that
the engine has been autostopped.
162
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
With the gear lever in neutral position:
• Depress the clutch pedal - the engine
starts automatically.
or
• Depress the accelerator pedal - the engine
starts automatically.
On a downhill gradient there is also the option
to start the engine automatically as follows:
• Release the foot brake and allow the car to
move off - the engine starts automatically
when the speed exceeds normal walking
pace.
After starting the engine:
• Engage a suitable gear and continue the
journey.
Gear indicator
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and
to change gear in time.
The driver is assisted by an
indicator which notifies the
driver when it is most advantageous to engage the next
higher or lower gear - GSI
(Gear Shift Indicator).
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
Indication is made with an up or down arrow in
the combined instrument panel's lower display.
Deactivate the Start/Stop function
Limitations
The engine does not auto-stop
Although the Start/Stop function is activated,
the engine does not stop automatically if:
• the driver has unbuckled the seatbelt.
• the car has not stopped completely.
• the car has been reversed and reverse gear
is disengaged.
• The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened.
• Misting forms on the windows.
• The outside temperature is below freezing
point or above approx. 30 °C.
• There is a temporarily high current take-off
or battery capacity drops below the minimum permitted level.
• The car starts to roll - faster than the equivalent normal walking pace.
• the engine does not have normal operating
temperature.
• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
• outside temperature is below freezing
WARNING
point or above approx. 30 °C.
The information display shows here that the Start/
Stop function has been disengaged.
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily
switch off the automatic
Start/Stop function - this is
carried out by pressing this
button once, at which point
the button's lamp goes out.
Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated by
a message appearing on the information display for about 5 seconds.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next
time the engine is started with the key.
• the environment in the passenger compartment differs from the preset values indicated by the ventilation fan running at
a high speed.
• battery capacity is below the minimum permitted level.
Do not open the bonnet when the engine
has stopped automatically - the engine may
suddenly start automatically. In order to
avoid starting automatically with raised
bonnet:
•
Engage a gear and apply the parking
brake.
06
• battery temperature is below freezing point
or above approx. 55 °C.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not
auto-start after having auto-stopped:
The engine auto-starts without driver
intervention
An auto-stopped engine may restart in some
cases without the driver having decided that
the journey should continue. In the following
cases the engine auto-starts even if the driver
has not depressed the clutch pedal in order to
engage a gear:
• The driver's seatbelt buckle has been
opened - a display text prompts the driver
to start the engine normally.
• A gear is engaged without declutching - a
display text prompts the driver to set the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
06 Starting and driving
DRIVe Start-Stop*
gear lever in neutral position in order to
enable auto-start.
Message
Involuntary engine stop
In the event that a start-up fails and the engine
stops, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically after the gear lever has
been set in neutral position. Prior to this the
information display showed the text PUT
GEAR IN NEUTRAL TO START.
Text message
In combination with this indicator
lamp the Start/Stop function may
display text messages on the information display for certain situations. A recommended action
should be performed for some of them. The
following table shows some examples.
A
06
B
Message
164
AUTO STARTSTOP ON
Illuminates for
about 5 seconds
after Start/Stop has
been activated.
AUTO STARTSTOP OFF
Illuminates for
about 5 seconds
after Start/Stop has
been switched off.
TURN KEY TO
START
The engine will not
auto-startA - perform a normal start
using the key.
PUT GEAR IN
NEUTRAL TO
START
Set the gear lever in
neutral positionB.
DEPRESS
CLUTCH PEDAL
TO START
The engine is ready
to auto-start - waiting for declutching.
AUTO STARTSTOP SERVICE
REQUIRED
Start/Stop function
disengaged. A workshop should be contacted.
Occurs if the seatbelt is unbuckled after the engine has autostopped, for example.
Occurs if a gear is engaged without declutching after the
engine has auto-stopped.
If a message does not go out after performing
an action a workshop should be contacted - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended,
which also applies in the event of the need for
any other form of technical assistance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
Brake servo
If the car is rolling or is being towed with the
engine turned off, the brake pedal must be
depressed about 5 times harder than when the
engine is running. If the brake pedal is
depressed when the engine is started, you will
feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to
the brake servo becoming active. This may be
more noticeable if the car has Emergency
Brake Assistance (EBA).
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
NOTE
If braking with the engine switched off,
press the brake pedal sharply once, not
repeatedly.
If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it
is still possible to brake the car. The brake
pedal will travel further and may feel softer than
normal. Harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.
Dampness can affect braking
characteristics
Brake components become wet when the car
is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water
or when the car is washed. This may alter brake
pad friction characteristics so that there is a
delay before braking effect is noticed.
Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time
if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy
snow, as well as after setting off in very damp
or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads
and dries off any water. This precaution is also
recommended before parking the car for a long
period in such weather conditions.
Maintenance
Brake circuits
This symbol illuminates if a brake
circuit is not working.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see
page 218.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brakes are used heavily
When driving in the Alps or other roads with
similar characteristics, the car's brakes are
heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not
being depressed especially hard.
Because speed is often low, the brakes are not
cooled as effectively as when driving on flat
roads at higher speed.
So as not to overload the brakes, shift down
when driving downhill instead of using the foot
brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as
you would use driving uphill. This uses engine
braking more efficiently so the foot brake is
only required for brief periods.
06
Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an
additional load on the car's brakes.
165
06 Starting and driving
Brake system
Anti-lock braking system - ABS
The anti-lock braking system
(ABS) prevents the wheels from
locking up during braking.
This means the ability to steer is
maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example.
After the engine has been started, the ABS will
perform a brief self-test at a speed of
about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as
pulses in the brake pedal.
To get the most out of the ABS:
1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.
Pulses will be felt.
2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do
not release the pressure on the pedal.
06
Practice braking with the ABS system in a traffic-free area and in different weather conditions.
Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA
For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake
Assist) provides full-strength braking instantaneously. The EBA function senses when heavy
braking is underway by registering how quickly
the brake pedal is depressed.
Continue braking without easing off on the
brake pedal. The function disengages when
the pressure on the brake pedal eases.
This function is always active. It cannot be disengaged.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a
fault in the brake system. If the level in the
brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,
drive carefully to the nearest workshop and
have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
166
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with
a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking.
After the car's speed has been slowed below
10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to
the normal constant glow - while at the same
time the hazard warning flashers are activated,
and they flash until the driver changes engine
speed with the accelerator pedal or they are
deactivated with their button, see page 70.
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
General
Reduced operation
Operation
1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menu
appears.
The stability and traction control system, DSTC
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps
the driver to avoid skidding and improves the
car's traction.
DSTC ON means that the system function
is unchanged.
A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking
or acceleration when the system is in action.
The car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that
system operation is reduced.
2. Press and hold the RESET button until the
DSTC menu is changed.
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
1
G029057
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
The system remains reduced until the
driver reactivates it or until the engine is
switched off - after the engine is started the
next time DSTC is back in its normal mode
again.
Controls and information display.
Thumbwheel1
RESET
WARNING
button1
The stability system is activated automatically
each time the car is started.
System operation during skidding and acceleration can be partially deactivated. Operation
during skidding is then delayed and so allows
more skidding which provides greater freedom
for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or
sand is improved at the same time as acceleration is no longer limited.
Suppressing system function may alter the
driving characteristics of the car.
06
NOTE
DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on
the display each time the engine is started.
No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
06 Starting and driving
DSTC – Stability and traction control system*
Messages on the information display
TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY
OFF means that the system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature.
–
The function is reactivated automatically
when the brakes have cooled.
ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system
disabled due to a fault.
–
06
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
> If the message remains when the engine
is restarted, drive to a workshop. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the symbols
same time:
are displayed at the
• Read the message on the information display.
appears alone then it may
If the symbol
appear as follows:
• Flashing light means that the DSTC system
is now being activated.
• Constant glow for 2 seconds means system check when the engine is started.
• Constant glow after starting the engine or
Symbols in the combined instrument
panel
DSTC system
Information
168
and
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
while driving means that there is a fault in
the DSTC system.
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
General information on parking
assistance
• Rear only.
• Both front and rear.
Limitations
Function
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. If the volume of another
audio source from the audio system is high,
then this is automatically lowered.
The tone becomes constant at a distance of
about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this
distance both behind and in front of the car, the
signal alternates between left and right-hand
speakers.
The system must be deactivated when reversing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar
or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier
would trigger the sensors.
NOTE
Rear parking assistance is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
Parking assistance both front and rear
Rear parking assistance only
Parking assistance front and rear.
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
A signal indicates the distance to a detected
obstacle.
WARNING
Parking assistance does not relinquish the
driver's own responsibility during parking.
The sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. Be aware of children or animals near the car.
Variants
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged and the message Park
Assist active EXIT to deactivate is shown on
the audio system's display.
06
If the system is switched off, the display shows
Park Assist deactivated ENTER to
activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged.
To change the settings, see page 81.
The distance covered behind the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the
rear loudspeakers.
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
06 Starting and driving
Park Assist*
The system is automatically engaged when the
car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is
illuminated. If parking assistance is switched
off with the button, the lamp goes out.
Front
Front parking assistance is active at speeds
below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at
higher speeds. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
The distance covered to the front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in
front comes from the front loudspeakers.
Limitations
Front parking assistance cannot be combined
with extra lights because the sensors are affected by the extra lights.
Fault indicator
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Rear
06
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles
behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.
Limitations
See the previous section Rear parking assistance only.
170
Cleaning the sensors
If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the
display shows PARK ASSIST
SERVICE REQUIRED then parking assistance is disengaged. For
attention, contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Parking assistance sensors.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS*
General
BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) is an
information system that under certain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to
vehicles moving in the same direction in the socalled "blind spot".
Blind spots
The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane
highways.
G020295
BLIS is based on camera technology. The cameras (1) are located under the door mirrors.
Rearview mirror with BLIS system.
BLIS camera
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
The system is a supplement to, not a
replacement for, a safe driving style and use
of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace
the driver's attention and responsibility. The
responsibility for changing lanes safely
always rests with the driver.
When a camera has detected a vehicle inside
the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illuminates with a constant glow.
NOTE
A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle.
If the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault
arises in the system. If for example the system's cameras are obscured then the BLIS
indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown
in the information display. In such cases, check
and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system
can be switched off temporarily by pressing the
BLIS button see page 172.
When BLIS operates
The system operates when the car is driven at
a speed above 10 km/h.
06
Overtaking
The system is designed to react if you overtake
another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h
faster than the other vehicle.
The system is designed to react if you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h
faster than your vehicle.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
171
06 Starting and driving
BLIS*
WARNING
Activate/deactivate
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS system message
BLIS does not work when the car is reversing.
A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal
other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can prevent the vehicle in the screened area from
being detected by BLIS.
Daylight and darkness
In daylight the system reacts to the shape of
the surrounding vehicles. The system is
designed to detect motor vehicles such as
cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.
06
In darkness the system reacts to the headlamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with
headlamps that are switched off are not
detected by the system. This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer
without headlamps which is towed behind a
car or truck.
WARNING
The system does not react to cyclists or
moped riders.
The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to
those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see
as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong
oncoming light or thick fog.
172
ton to clear the text message. For more information on messages, see page 52.
Text on the display
Specification
BLIS ON
The BLIS system is
activated.
BLIS REDUCED
FUNCTION
Reduced function in
data transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electrical system.
Button for Off/On (button location depends on
other selected equipment).
The camera resets
itself when the data
transmission
between the BLIS
system's camera
and the car's electrical system returns to
normal.
BLIS is activated when the engine is started.
The indicator lamps in the door panels flash
three times when BLIS is activated.
The system can be deactivated/activated by
pressing the BLIS button.
When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button
goes out and a text message is shown on the
instrument panel display.
When BLIS is activated the light in the button
illuminates, a new text message is shown on
the display and the indicator lamps in the door
panels flash three times. Press the READ but-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
BLIS CAMERA
BLOCKED
One or both cameras blocked - clean
the lenses.
06 Starting and driving
BLIS*
Specification
BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED
Blind spot syst. disengaged - contact a
workshop.
BLIS OFF
The BLIS system is
deactivated.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS system components
must only be performed by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Cleaning
Limitations
In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may
illuminate despite there being no other vehicle
within the blind spot.
G018177
Text on the display
NOTE
If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on isolated occasions despite there being no
other vehicle within the blind spot then this
does not mean that a fault has arisen in the
system.
Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g.
noise barrier or concrete road surface.
In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the
display shows the text BLIS SERVICE
REQUIRED.
Here are several examples of situations where
the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if
there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.
Low sun in the camera.
In order to work most effectively the BLIS camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can be
cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.
Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not
scratched.
06
IMPORTANT
The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice
or snow. If necessary, brush snow away
from the lenses.
Reflection from shiny wet road surface.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
173
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
Start assistance
WARNING
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged
and the engine does not start. Do not tow the
car to bump start the engine, see page 178.
IMPORTANT
•
The steering lock must be unlocked
before towing - the lock stays in the
position it was in when the voltage was
disconnected.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
Bump starting the car can damage the catalytic converter.
•
Towing
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before towing begins.
2. The key must remain in the ignition switch
while the car is being towed.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off. The
brake pedal must be pressed about five
times harder than normal, and the steering
will be considerably heavier than normal.
3. Keep the towline taut when the towing
vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot
gently pressed on the brake pedal thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.
4. Be prepared to brake to stop.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
–
174
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Cars with automatic gearbox must not
be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or
further than 80 km.
NOTE
If the car is de-energised then the steering
lock must be unlocked using a donor battery before towing can be started.
1. Turn the remote control key to position II
and unlock the steering lock so that the car
can be steered, see page 151.
06
Never remove the key from the ignition
switch when the car is being towed.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Move gear lever into neutral and release
the parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Powershift
The model with Powershift transmission
should not be towed as it is dependent on the
engine running in order to receive sufficient
lubrication. If towing still has to take place, the
route must be as short as possible and then
with very low speed.
In the event of uncertainty as to whether or not
the car is equipped with Powershift transmission, this can be verified by checking the designation on the decal number (5) under the
bonnet - see page 284. The designation
"MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmission - otherwise it is Geartronic transmission.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
IMPORTANT
Avoid towing.
•
However, the car can be towed for a
short distance at low speed to move it
from a dangerous position - not further
than 10 km and not faster than
10 km/h. Note that the car must always
be towed with the wheels rolling forward.
•
In the event of moving a longer distance
than 10 km, the car must be transported
with the drive wheels raised from the
road - professional recovery is recommended.
Prior to towing:
–
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
06
175
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
Towing eye
06
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side
of the bumper, front or rear.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye (1) that is located
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which
must be opened in different ways:
• Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
176
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
• The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the marking with a finger and fold out the opposite side/corner at the same time using
a coin or similar - the cover turns around
its axis and can then be removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or
out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for
recovery assistance.
06 Starting and driving
Towing and recovery
NOTE
On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing
eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.
In which case, secure the tow rope in the
towbar.
For this reason it is advisable to store the
towbar's towball in the car, see page 181.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The car must always be towed with the wheels
rolling forward.
IMPORTANT
Cars with automatic gearbox must only be
towed with drive wheels raised from the
road.
06
177
06 Starting and driving
Start assistance
Starting with a donor battery
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
6. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
If the battery is flat then the car can be started
with current from another battery.
06
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or
other damage:
1. Turn the remote control key to key position
0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage
of 12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine and
make sure that the two cars do not touch
each other.
178
7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point,
such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).
8. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no sparks
during the starting procedure.
9. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
10. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery - see
page 230.
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 287.
If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised
Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with
the necessary equipment for driving with a
trailer.
• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Please wait until it has been
driven at least 1000 km.
• The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
• For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with a
trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the
regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
• The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped
for driving with a trailer.
• Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket follows the
specified maximum towball load.
• Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure decal location, see page 196.
• Clean the towing bracket regularly and
grease the towball1.
• The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
1
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer
may be difficult to control in the event of
sudden movement and braking.
Manual gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)
- otherwise the oil temperature may
become too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 287.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further limit
trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be
certified for higher towing weights than the
car can actually tow.
• If an engine starts to run too hot, the instrument panel will display a text message
which recommends switching to a lower
gear - follow the recommendation given.
06
• In the event of a risk of overheating the
optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000
rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.
Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.
179
06 Starting and driving
Driving with a trailer
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
• An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
• Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to drive
at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
IMPORTANT
See also the specific information on slow
driving with trailer for cars with the
Powershift automatic transmission on page
159.
06
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to parking position
P.
4. Release the foot brake.
• Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
180
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
• Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
Towbar
Trailer cable
Storing the towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,
the installation instructions for the loose section must be followed carefully, see page 183.
WARNING
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Towbar storage space.
Important checks
• The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car,
firmly fastened with its strap.
G014589
•
G031115
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has
7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved
by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag
on the ground.
06
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the towball.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
06 Starting and driving
Towing equipment*
G009522
G009519
G009518
Specifications
Dimensions for mounting points (mm)
06
182
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
854
98
100
140
130
113
150
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
1. Remove the protective cover by first pressing in the catch
and then pulling the
cover straight back
.
2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
G020302
G020301
G017317
Fitting the towbar
3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows
red. If the window does not show red,
press in
and turn the locking wheel antiuntil you hear a click.
clockwise
06
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
G020309
G020307
G020304
5. Check that the indicator window shows
green.
4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position. Remove the key from the lock.
06
7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling
it up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G020306
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Detachable towbar*
8. Safety cable.
WARNING
1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
G020312
G020301
G020310
Removing the towbar
2. Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to
the correct place.
06
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
06 Starting and driving
3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
06
G017318
G020314
Detachable towbar*
4. Push on the protective cover.
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see page 181.
186
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Starting and driving
Loading
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a
corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 287.
• Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a
lowered backrest.
• Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery or the glass
surface of the tailgate.
• Secure all loads to the load retaining eyeWARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
lets with straps or web lashings.
To increase the size of the cargo area, the head
restraints can be removed and the seats folded
down, see page 116.
Place the load firmly against the backrest in
front.
Carefully follow the mounting instructions supplied with the carriers.
• Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry
the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
Loading the cargo area
Stop the engine and apply the parking brake
when loading or unloading long objects. The
gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out
of position by long loads, which could set the
car in motion.
Load carriers*
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, it is recommended to use load carriers specially designed
for your car by Volvo.
• Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
• The size of the area exposed to the wind,
WARNING
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the load's size.
Never load cargo above the backrest.
• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
heavy braking and hard cornering.
06
Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing
injury to the car's occupants.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
• The head rests can be removed so that
they are not damaged.
• Put wide loads in the centre.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
06 Starting and driving
Adjusting headlamp pattern
Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.
G021422
Headlamps with Active Bending Lights
G021421
Halogen headlamps
G020317
Correct light pattern for left or righthand traffic
Left-hand traffic.
Left-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Right-hand traffic.
Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.
06
The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a
control in each headlamp housing to avoid
dazzling oncoming motorists.
The correct pattern will also better illuminate
the verge.
188
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
06 Starting and driving
06
189
General..................................................................................................
Tyre pressure........................................................................................
Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ....................................................
Changing wheels...................................................................................
Emergency puncture repair*.................................................................
190
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
192
196
197
199
201
WHEELS AND TYRES
07 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics and tyres
Speed ratings
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
The car is approved as a whole, which means
that dimensions and speed ratings must not
differ from those specified on the vehicle registration document. The only exception to
these conditions is winter tyres (both those
with metal studs and those without). If such a
tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster
than the speed rating of the tyre (for example,
class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h).
When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the
same type and dimensions, and preferably also
the same make, are fitted to all four wheels.
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified on the tyre pressure label, see
page 196.
Designation of dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example: 205/55R16 91 W.
07
New tyres
Remember that traffic regulations determine
how fast a car can be driven, not the speed
class of the tyres.
Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.
205
Tyre width (mm)
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
55
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
R
Radial ply
V
240 km/h
16
Rim diameter in inches (")
W
270 km/h
91
Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)
Y
300 km/h
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed (in this case 270 km/h)
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.
For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as
possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The
last four digits in the sequence mean the week
and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's
DOT marking (Department of Transportation),
and this is stated with four digits, for example
1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Tyre age
All tyres older than six years should be checked
by an expert even if they seem undamaged.
192
07 Wheels and tyres
General
The reason for this is that tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.
The function can therefore be affected due to
the tyre's constituent materials being broken
down. In such a case the tyre should then not
be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter
tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples
of external signs which indicate that the tyre is
unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.
wards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This
is why it is important for the rear wheels never
to lose grip before the front wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging
up, and not standing up.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
The age of the tyre can be determined by the
DOT marking, see previous illustration.
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific
winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are
dependent on engine variant. When driving on
winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
More even wear and maintenance
Studded tyres
G020323
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 196. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop for checking if you are uncertain
about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the least
worn tyres must always be placed on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor
grip in rain and snow.
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear
Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down
to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height
with the tread wear indicators. Change to new
tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
07
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore
193
07 Wheels and tyres
General
recommended not to drive on winter tyres that
have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)
Steel rims are normally mounted with the
standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn variety may also be used.
Snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive
cars.
WARNING
Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims.
The wheel could come loose.
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts
(2)
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and
tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of
uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Rims and wheel nuts
07
Only use wheel rims that are tested and
approved by Volvo and which are included in
the Volvo genuine accessories range.
Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with
aluminium rims.
Standard wheel nuts - tightening torque:
110 Nm
Bulge acorn wheel nuts - tightening torque:
130 Nm
Locking wheel nuts - tightening torque:
110 Nm
There are three different models of wheel nut.
1. Tighten the wheel nuts.
2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
Overtightening can damage the nuts and
the bolts.
194
NOTE
These nuts may also be used with steel rims.
Locking wheel nuts (3)
Locking wheel nuts can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking
wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel
covers, the locking wheel nut should be mounted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise
the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.
07 Wheels and tyres
General
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare
wheel on the car.
IMPORTANT
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Summer and winter wheels
rain, snow and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth.
G020325
Spare wheel Temporary Spare*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the
use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is
smaller than the normal wheel. The car's
ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay
attention to high kerbs and do not machine
wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the
front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the
same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on
the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare
wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre
pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the
tyre pressure table, see page 298.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
see page 199, the wheels should be marked
with which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres
with a tread pattern which are designed to only
turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only
be switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa.
07
If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
07 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Recommended tyre pressure
NOTE
G007505
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also
varies depending on ambient temperature.
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar shows which pressures the tyres should
have at different load and speed conditions.
• Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre size
07
• ECO pressure1
• Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Checking the tyre pressure
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
196
An important detail in connection with environmentally-conscious driving is to use the right
type of tyres and to drive with the correct air
pressure inside them.
Even after several kilometres of driving, the
tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So
air must not be released if the pressure is
checked when the tyres are warm. While the
pressure must be increased if it is too low.
Dimensions
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel consumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the
car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre
pressure that is too low can also result in the
tyres overheating and disintegrating.
The 195/65 R15 and 205/55 R16 dimensions
generally provide a slightly lower consumption
than wider variants.
For information on the correct tyre pressure,
refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified
tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature.)
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre
pressure for maximum load is recommended
in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.
Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road
noise and steering characteristics.
1
2
DRIVe*
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
The pressure that is recommended for maximum load.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When fitting new tyres, the same type and
brand as the car was equipped with from the
factory are recommended - they are designed
for low fuel consumption.
Pressure
Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel consumption. For this reason, check the pressure
in the tyres regularly.
By using so-called ECO pressure2 fuel consumption is minimised. A certain impact on ride
comfort, road noise and steering characteristics may be experienced, but this does not
affect safety.
See the decal with the recommended tyre
pressure adjacent to the driver's door pillar.
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
Warning triangle
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to the traffic.
1. Undo the case containing the warning triangle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take
the warning triangle from the case.
2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
firmly secured in the cargo area after use.
Spare wheel* and jack *
NOTE
The car's original jack*
The original jack* must only be used for changing wheels. The jack's thread should always be
well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and
wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the
cargo area.
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
07
Taking out the spare wheel
A bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
2. Unscrew the retaining bolt and lift out the
wheel.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
07 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle* and spare wheel *
Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into
the cargo area
Wheel wrench*.
First aid*
A case with first aid equipment is located in the
cargo area.
Jack* and handle, secured with a tensioning strap.
The spare wheel is bolted down with the
rim side down using the through-bolt.
Tools - returning into place
Tools and jack* must be returned into place in
the correct manner after use.
• For cars equipped with spare wheel, the
jack must be cranked so that it fits into the
spare wheel.
• For cars equipped with emergency puncture repair kit, the jack must be fully
cranked together and returned into the
foam block.
IMPORTANT
07
198
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Removing wheels
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which
is indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
G020331
1. Take out the spare wheel*, the jack* and
the wheel wrench* that are located under
the carpet in the cargo area. If another jack
is selected, see page 219.
Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be
changed at a busy location. Make sure that the
car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it
is free from dirt.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage
reverse gear, or position P if the car has an
automatic gearbox.
3. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
Telescopic wheel wrench.
6. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car.
4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel
covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the
end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by
hand.
07
5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
07 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the
wheel.
Fitting the wheel
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.
Jacking points
There is a recess in the plastic cover at
each point. Crank the foot of the jack down
so it is pressed squarely on the ground.
Check that the jack is seated correctly in
the intended jacking point, as illustrated,
and that the base is located directly under
it.
07
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
200
3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel nuts are tightened
properly. See page 194 for tightening torques. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Ensure that passengers wait with the car or preferably a crash barrier - between them
and the road.
NOTE
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured
tyre, switching between summer tyres and
winter tyres, etc. Only the jack belonging to
the specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack
is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the
equipment.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
Emergency puncture repair, general
information
NOTE
WARNING
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in
the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency
puncture repair kit if they have larger slits,
cracks or similar damage.
There are two 12 V sockets for connecting the
compressor in the tunnel console, see
page 54. Choose the electrical socket that is
nearest the punctured tyre.
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
Taking out the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit with compressor and tools are stored under the floor in
the cargo area.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor.
IMPORTANT
The emergency puncture repair kit is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as
a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle
must be replaced before its expiration date and
after use.
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets in the tunnel console, see page 54, no
other current consumer must be connected
to the other one.
2. Unscrew the bolt and remove the holder.
3. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.
NOTE
07
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
201
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
Overview
1. Insert the emergency puncture repair kit.
Decal, maximum permitted speed
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
2. Align the holder in the inner and lower
grooves of the spare wheel well
Switch
3. Screw in the bolt.
Cable
1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture
repair kit.
Bottle holder (orange cap)
NOTE
07
Incorrect installation of the holder may
cause the emergency puncture repair kit to
rattle.
Pressure reducing valve
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed and affix it to the steering wheel.
Protective cap
Air hose
202
G019723
Sealing punctured tyres
G020400
Fitting the emergency puncture repair kit
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of the
two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no
other current consumer must be connected
to the other one.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
5. Screw the bottle into its holder.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum
pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is
3.5 bar.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit
the valve cap.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be
switched off immediately. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3
km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that
the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment.
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
07
3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be
continued. Contact a tyre centre.
4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
203
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
specified on the tyre pressure decal.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has been
used. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of
the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if
it needs to be replaced.
5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.
Inflating the tyres
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
07
6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit
to the cargo area.
7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
204
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
3. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch
to position I.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using
the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and cable.
7. Refit the dust cap.
07 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair*
Changing the sealing fluid canister
Replace the bottle before the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Leave the container at a collection point for
storing dangerous waste.
07
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
205
Cleaning................................................................................................ 208
Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 212
Rustproofing......................................................................................... 214
206
CAR CARE
08 Car care
Cleaning
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
• Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour
paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
• Hose down the underbody.
• Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has
been removed in order to reduce the risk
of scratches from washing. Do not spray
directly onto the locks.
• If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces
must not then be warmed up by the sun!
• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
• Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
Do not use any strong solvents.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
surfaces.
• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
08
208
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing water
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
risk of water stains that may need to be
polished away is reduced.
Removing bird droppings
Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. This discoloration can only be
removed by a specialist.
Chromed wheels
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have
condensation on the inside of the lens. This
is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting
is designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp when it
has been switched on for a time.
soap solution or car shampoo.
• Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo.
IMPORTANT
Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on
chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a
sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.
High-pressure washing
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,
as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,
impair the service life of wiper blades.
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the
surface of the car (the distance applies to all
exterior parts).
08 Car care
Cleaning
IMPORTANT
Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.
When using a pressure washer: Make sure
that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not
closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the
same thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components (such as glossy trim mouldings).
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment such
as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre
sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such
treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax
the car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.
More stubborn stains can be removed using
fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the
packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax.
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning
agents.
Carpets and cargo area
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a
vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
–
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
08
209
08 Car care
Cleaning
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting
caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer!
Treatment of stains on textile upholstery
and headliner
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
regular cleaning is required in order to maintain
both characteristics and appearance. Volvo
offers a comprehensive product for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the leather's protective coating.
After a period of use the natural appearance of
the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on the surface texture of the
leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather
and shows that it is a natural product.
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is available from your Volvo dealer.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
•
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appearance.
08
210
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined and
processed so that it retains its natural characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened
sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
Vacuuming is important prior to using leather
care agents.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and improved UV protection.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g.
rings).
08 Car care
Cleaning
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-moistened sponge and neutral soap.
• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from your
Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry
before allowing it to retract.
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a
solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.
Never use strong stain removers.
08
211
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
Paintwork
Stone chips and scratches
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged
paintwork should be rectified immediately. The
most common types of paintwork damage are
stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use
a primer. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be
used for better results - spray into the
spray can's cap and brush thinly.
G020345
Colour code (Paint code)
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above
15 °C.
Materials
• primer1 - for e.g. plastic-clad bumpers
Data plate.
Code for car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 284.
08
1
2
212
there are special adhesive primers available in spray cans
• base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
• masking tape
• fine sand paper1.
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
2. A light sanding with very fine abrasive
material can be performed locally before
painting if necessary (e.g. if there are rough
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect
the undamaged paintwork.
08 Car care
Touching up paintwork
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
08
213
08 Car care
Rustproofing
Inspection and maintenance
Your car has already received a thorough and
complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of
the body are made of galvanised sheet metal.
The underbody is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
members, cavities and closed sections.
Maintain the car's rustproofing.
• Keep the car clean. Hose down the underbody. If using a pressure washer, keep the
nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted surfaces.
• Regularly check and touch-up the rustproofing treatment as necessary.
The car's rustproofing does not normally
require treatment for approximately 12 years.
After this period, it should be treated at threeyear intervals. If the car needs further treatment, Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.
08
214
08 Car care
08
215
Volvo service.........................................................................................
Self-maintenance..................................................................................
Bonnet and engine compartment.........................................................
Oils and fluids.......................................................................................
Wiper blades.........................................................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Replacing bulbs....................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
216
218
219
220
222
228
230
234
240
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
09
Volvo service
Volvo service programme
Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly
test driven. It was checked again in accordance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations
before it was handed over to you.
To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo also recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to perform the
service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and
service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Special service measures
Certain service measures which affect the car's
electrical system can only be performed using
electronic equipment specially developed for
your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends
that you always contact an authorised Volvo
workshop before beginning or performing
service work that affects the electrical system.
218
09 Maintenance and service
Self-maintenance
Before starting work on the car
Raising the car
Battery
Check that the battery cables are correctly
connected and tightened.
Never disconnect the battery when the engine
is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).
Check regularly
• Coolant – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the expansion
tank.
The battery contains acid that is both corrosive
and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the
battery in an environmentally correct manner.
Let your Volvo dealer assist you.
• Engine oil – The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
• Power steering fluid – The level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils
when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop
lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are
fixed under the lifting points. See preceding
illustration.
Check the following at regular intervals, for
example, when refuelling:
Never use a quick charger to charge the battery. The battery cables must be disconnected
when charging the battery.
The ignition system has very high voltage
and output. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dangerous. The ignition must
therefore always be switched off for work in
the engine compartment.
09
NOTE
•
Washer fluid – The reservoir should be well
filled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze at
temperatures around freezing point.
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions for
use supplied with the equipment.
• Brake and clutch fluid – The level must be
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the subframe.
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always
use axle stands or similar.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is
hot.
between the MIN and MAX marks.
WARNING
219
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
Opening the bonnet
The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.
1. Pull the handle on the far left under the
instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars
the handle is on the far right.) You will hear
when the catch releases.
2. Insert your hand under the centre of the
front edge of the bonnet and press the
safety catch to the right.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Engine compartment
3. Open the bonnet.
Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for the power steering fluid (concealed behind the headlamp)
1
2
220
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
The location varies depending on engine alternative.
Dipstick1 for engine oil2
Radiator
Radiator fan
Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand
drive)
Filling the engine oil2
09 Maintenance and service
Bonnet and engine compartment
09
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand
drive)
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Air filter2
Climate control system
Fault tracing and repair
The air conditioning system contains a fluorescent tracing agent. Use ultraviolet light during
leakage detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must
only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
2
The location varies depending on engine alternative.
221
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
Checking the engine oil
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
Always use oil of the prescribed grade.
Check the oil level frequently and change
the oil regularly. The engine will be damaged
if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven
with the oil level too low.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 290.
1
222
Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service
and Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 290.
For capacities, see page 291 and onwards.
Engine with oil dipstick1
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and
then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other
variants have an oil level sensor, and then the
driver is informed via the warning symbol in the
centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Certain models have both variants.
Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.
Petrol engine.
Dipstick, petrol engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
below, then an additional amount is
required.
6. If required, check the level again, do it after
driving a short distance. Then repeat steps
1 - 4.
WARNING
G020336
Never fill above the MAX mark. The level
should never be above MAX or below MIN
as this could lead to engine damage.
Diesel engine.
Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.
Filler pipe, engine oil.
Checking the oil level in a new car is especially
important before the first scheduled oil change.
Volvo recommends checking the oil level every
2 500 km. The most accurate measurements
are made on a cold engine before starting. The
measurement will be inaccurate if taken immediately after the engine is switched off. The
dipstick will indicate that the level is too low
because the oil has not had time to flow down
into the oil sump.
The oil level must be within the area marked on the
dipstick.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Measurement and filling if required
1. Ensure that the car is level. After switching
off the engine it is important to wait
5 minutes to allow the oil time to run back
to the sump.
2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.
3. Re-insert the dipstick.
4. Pull it out and check the level.
5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litres
should be added. If the level is significantly
223
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
For engines with electronic oil level
sensor2
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low,
Fill oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven
about 30 km before the oil level display is
correct.
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Filler pipe.3
You do not need to take action with respect to
the engine oil level before a message is shown
in the display, see the illustration below.
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 62.
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
2
3
224
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
Measuring the oil level
Washer fluid, topping up
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
09
NOTE
Mix concentrated washer fluid with water
before filling.
1. Activate key position II, see page 150.
TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up
washer fluid.
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Engine oil level
Please wait....
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
Checking and topping up the coolant
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
For capacities, see the table Fluids on page
293.
Filling in cars with diesel engine.
Filling in cars with petrol engine.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4.
Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winter
so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,
reservoir and hoses.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk
of freezing increases with both too little and too
much coolant concentrate.
225
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling system clean with approved quality
tap water or flush with ready-mixed
coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur
resulting in the risk of damage (cracks)
in the cylinder head.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 293.
4
226
Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures
could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)
to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when
the level falls to the MIN mark.
Checking and topping up the brake and
clutch fluid
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
NOTE
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting
in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder
head.
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir4. The fluid level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see the table Fluids on page 293.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent
braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
09 Maintenance and service
Oils and fluids
09
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
Checking and topping up the power
steering fluid
NOTE
Check the level frequently.
The fluid does not require changing. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 293.
If a fault should arise in the power steering system or if the car is without power and must be
towed, it can still be steered. However, the
steering will be much heavier than normal and
it will require more effort to turn the steering
wheel.
227
09 Maintenance and service
09
Wiper blades
Wiper blades
Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen
Lift up the wiper arm.
Press the button located on the wiper
blade mounting and pull straight out (1),
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a
"click" is heard.
> Check (3) that the blade is firmly installed and fold down the wiper arm.
G020330
Changing the rear window wiper blade
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the other side.
G007444
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
page 208.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly.
Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.
228
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling it
towards the rear window.
3. Press the new wiper blade into position.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades
09
> Check that it is firmly installed and fold
back the wiper arm.
229
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions and climatic conditions.
• Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
• Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
•
230
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to
be recharged if the car is not used for a
longer time or when it is only driven short
distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to
a battery charger with automatic trickle
charging.
Symbols on the battery
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Changing the battery
2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
Removal
3. Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
Risk of explosion.
2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any
electrical terminals.
> The car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to the
control modules.
4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.
3. Remove the cover.
For more information on the car's battery - see
pages 178 and 300.
4. Detach the black negative cable.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
5. Connect the red positive cable.
6. Connect the black negative cable.
7. Attach the cover to the battery.
DRIVe Start/Stop*
WARNING
5. Detach the red positive cable.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
battery for starting and one standby battery
that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence.
6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using
a screwdriver.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 161.
Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.
An expended battery must be recycled in an
environmentally correct manner as it contains lead.
09
7. Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
8. Release the clamp securing the battery.
9. Remove the battery.
Fitting
1. Fit the battery into position.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
231
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
Battery
Cold start
capacityA,
CCA (A)
A
B
Start
Standby
760
120
DimensionsB,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×19
0
150×90×106
Capacity
(Ah)
70
8
• The engine auto-starts1 without the driver
depressing the clutch pedal.
Location of the batteries
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's main battery must never be used
for connecting an external battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
In accordance with the SAE standard.
Largest possible size.
NOTE
•
•
The higher the current take-off in the car
(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the more
the batteries must be charged =
increased fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the battery has
fallen below the lowest permissible level
then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
1. Battery2 2. Standby battery.
The standby battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in
the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due
to high current take-off means:
1
2
232
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
The battery is described in detail on page 230.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
NOTE
If the battery has become so discharged
that everything is "black" and in principle
the car does not have all the normal electrical functions and the engine is subsequently
started using an external battery or battery
charger, then the Start/Stop function will be
activated. It will then be possible for the
engine to be auto-stopped but in the event
of an auto-stop the Start/Stop function may
fail to auto-start the engine due to inadequate capacity in the battery.
The battery must first be charged in order to
ensure a successful auto-start after an autostop. At an outside temperature of +15 °C
the battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour. At a lower outside temperature a
charging time of 3-4 hours is recommended. The recommendation is that the
battery is charged using an external battery
charger.
If this is not possible then the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the
Start/Stop function until the battery has
been adequately recharged.
For more information about recharging the
battery, see the section "Battery" in the
chapter "Maintenance and service".
233
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
General
Changing front bulbs
All bulb specifications are given on page 300.
3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then
forward.
The following list contains locations of bulbs
and other light sources that are specialised or
unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:
4. Unplug the connector by pressing down
the clip with a thumb while moving out the
connector with the other hand.
• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
• Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler
• Direction indicators, door mirror and
approach lighting
• Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glovebox lighting
• General interior lighting in the roof
• Brake light
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Working with
Xenon lamps demands extreme caution
because the headlamp is equipped with a
high voltage unit.
All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are
changed by first removing the lamp housing
from the engine compartment.
Removing the lamp housing
1. Remove the remote control key and turn
the light switch to position 0.
5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.
Fitting the lamp housing
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease and oil from your fingers are vaporised by the heat, coating the
reflector and then causing damage.
234
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp
housing and locking pin. Check that the pin
is correctly inserted.
2. Check the lighting.
The lamp housing must be plugged in and
secured in place before the lighting is switched
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
Main beam
on or the remote control key inserted into the
ignition switch.
Dipped beam
Fitting a new bulb
1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one position.
Removing the cover and bulb
2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly
to the right in order to snap it into position.
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
3. Press the connector back on.
2. Bend aside the catches and remove the
cover.
4. Refit the plastic cover.
3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.
First, press it to the left to release it, then
out and down.
4. Pull out the bulb.
5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.
1. Remove the entire lamp housing.
2. Left-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.
Right-hand headlamp:
turn the bulb holder clockwise.
3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the
bulb.
4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted
in one position.
5. Refit the lamp housing.
``
235
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
Position/parking lamps
Direction indicators
Side marker lamps
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
remove it.
1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and
withdraw it. Replace the bulb.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted
in one position.
2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.
2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one
position.
3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into
the lamp housing.
236
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
Front fog lamps
7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the
bulb holder must always be upward.
3. The bulbs are located in separate bulb
holders.
8. Secure the lamp housing with the screw
and press the panel back into place.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
Removing the bulb holder
09
5. Press the catches together and pull out the
bulb holder.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Plug in the connector.
8. Press the bulb holder into place and refit
the cover (A or B).
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
2. Pull the cover straight out in the direction
of the centre of the car using a tool, see the
illustration above.
> Loosen the clips (1) and pull straight out
(2).
All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced
from inside the cargo area.
3. Remove the screw securing the lamp
housing and take out the lamp housing.
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/righthand panel to access the bulbs.
5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.
6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.
237
09 Maintenance and service
09
Replacing bulbs
Location of bulbs in the rear bulb
holder
NOTE
Cargo area
The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left
rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and
in the right on a right-hand drive.
G007613
Number plate lighting
Brake light
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
Position/parking and rear fog lamps
2. Remove the blown bulb.
Position/parking lamps
3. Fit a new bulb.
Reversing lamp
Direction indicators
1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote
control key to position 0.
Position/parking lamps
2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
3. Detach the lens carefully.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Refit and screw in the lens.
238
09 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
09
Vanity mirror lighting*
G010326
Passenger compartment lighting in
cargo area
Cargo area lighting also includes a further lamp
on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that
the lens detaches.
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lock lugs on the
edge.
2. Snap off the lamp lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with the
pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could then
be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
239
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
General
All electrical functions and components are
fused to protect the car's electrical system
from damage by short circuiting and overloading.
The fuses are in two different locations in the
car:
• Relay/Fuse box in the engine compartment.
• Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment.
Changing
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and blew.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Each fuse box has space for several spare
fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then
there is a fault in the component. In which case,
Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised
Volvo workshop for this to be checked.
240
WARNING
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and
possibly lead to fire.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
G007446
Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment
The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to
replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the
same colour and amperage.
• Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.
• Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type and
• Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and
must only be replaced by a workshop.1
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
should be replaced by a workshop.1
1
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
``
241
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
G020250
09
1.
Cooling fan
50 A
8.
ABS valves
20 A
16.
Infotainment system
30 A
2.
Power steering
80 A
9.
Engine functions
30 A
17.
Windscreen wipers
30 A
3.
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
10.
Ventilation fan
40 A
18.
60 A
11.
Headlamp washers
20 A
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
40 A
Supply to passenger compartment fuse box
60 A
12.
Heated rear window
30 A
5.
PTC element, air preheater*
80 A
13.
Actuator solenoid, starter
motor
30 A
6.
Glow plugs (D4162T)
60 A
14.
Trailer wiring*
40 A
Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel)
70 A
15.
Reserve
ABS pump
40 A
4.
7.
242
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
–
19.
Reserve
20.
Horn
15 A
21.
Fuel-driven additional heater,
passenger compartment
heater*
20 A
22.
Reserve
–
–
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
23.
24.
Engine control module (5-cyl.
petrol), Transmission control
module (5-cyl.)
32.
10 A
Transmission control module
(4-cyl.)
15 A
Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel),
PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl.
diesel)
20 A
Central electronic module
(CEM) (Start/Stop)
10 A
26.
Ignition switch
15 A
27.
A/C compressor
10 A
28.
Reserve
29.
Front fog lamps
25.
–
Daytime running lights (DRL)*
15 A
30.
Coolant pump (Start/Stop)
10 A
31.
Voltage regulator, alternator
(4-cyl. petrol)
33.
34.
Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbo
control valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oil
level sensor (5-cyl. diesel)
35.
Control valve, fuel flow
(D4162T), Mass air flow sensor
(D4162T), Control motor turbo
(D4162T)
10 A
Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol),
Relay coil, relay, vacuum
pump (5-cyl. petrol), Engine
control module (5-cyl. diesel),
Heated fuel filter (D4162T)
20 A
Ignition coils (petrol), Pressure
switch, climate control system
(5-cyl.), Control module, glow
plugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGR
emission control (5-cyl. diesel),
Lambda-sond (D4162T),
Engine control module (Start/
Stop), Relay coils, relays Start/
Stop
36.
Relay coil, relay, climate control system, PTC element, oil
trap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass air
flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol),
Turbo control valve (5-cyl. petrol), Solenoids, variable valve
timing (5-cyl. petrol), Injectors
(2.0 l petrol), EVAP valve (2.0 l
petrol), Valve, air/fuel mixture
(2.0 l petrol), Control valve, fuel
pressure (5-cyl. diesel), Engine
control module (5-cyl. diesel),
Engine EGR (D4162T)
15 A
Engine control module (petrol,
D4162T), Accelerator pedal
position sensor, Lambda-sond
(5-cyl. diesel)
10 A
09
10 A
10 A
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
243
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
For more information on DRIVe Start/Stop see page 161.
DRIVe Start/Stop*
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
No.
244
Component
A
11M/1
Engine compartment,
electrical distribution
unit
125
11M/2
Sensor, battery monitoring
15
25
Central electronic module (CEM) (Reference
voltage standby battery), diesel engine
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
G020601
Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment
The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses
are located under the glovebox. The box also
provides space for several spare fuses. Tools
for fuse replacement are located in the relay/
fuse box in the engine compartment, see
page 241.
Replacing fuses
completely. The fuse box can be fully
unhooked.
4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.
5. Remove the pins from the centre of the
clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the
pins into the clips. This expands the clips
and secures the trim.
Remove the trim concealing the fuse box
by pressing in the pin in the centre of the
clips (1) about one cm and then withdrawing the clips.
Turn the two wing screws (that secure the
fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove
them.
Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it
towards the seat until it stops. Lower it
245
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
246
Telematics*, Audio system,
RTI*, Bluetooth*
15 A
SRS system, Engine control
module (5-cyl, D4162T)
10 A
Electrical socket, passenger
compartment
15 A
Passenger compartment, glovebox and courtesy lighting
5A
Interior lighting, Remote controlled garage door opener*
Washer, rear window
49.
SRS system
50.
Reserve
51.
PTC element, air preheater*,
Relay coil, relay, heated fuel
filter (5-cyl. diesel)
52.
10 A
56.
–
57.
10 A
58.
Remote control receiver,
Siren*
10 A
Data link connector (DLC),
brake light switch
15 A
Main beam, right, Relay coil,
relay, auxiliary lamps*
7.5 A
Transmission control module,
ABS system
5A
59.
Main beam, left
7.5 A
53.
Power steering
10 A
60.
Seat heating (driver's side)
15 A
5A
54.
Parking assistance*, Xenon*
10 A
61.
Seat heating (passenger side)
15 A
15 A
55.
Control module Keyless*
20 A
62.
Sunroof*
20 A
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
63.
Reserve
–
78.
Reserve
64.
Reserve
–
79.
65.
Audio, Infotainment
Reversing lamp, Dimming,
interior rearview mirror (signal)
66.
Audio, Infotainment, Climate
control system
67.
Reserve
68.
Cruise control
69.
Climate control system, Rain
sensor, Buttons for BLIS*,
parking assistance*, DRIVe
5A
–
5A
80.
Reserve
-
10 A
81.
Reserve
–
–
82.
Supply to front right door
25 A
5A
83.
Supply to front left door
25 A
84.
Power seat, passenger
25 A
5A
85.
Power seat, driver
25 A
86.
Interior lighting, cargo area
lighting, power seats, fuel
level display (2.0F)
5A
70.
Reserve
–
71.
Reserve
–
72.
Reserve
–
73.
Sunroof*, Overhead console
for interior lighting, Seatbelt
reminder, rear, Dimming, interior rearview mirror*
5A
74.
Fuel pump
15 A
75.
Reserve
–
76.
Reserve
–
77.
Reserve
–
09
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
General..................................................................................................
Audio functions.....................................................................................
Radio functions.....................................................................................
CD functions.........................................................................................
Menu structure – audio system.............................................................
Phone functions*...................................................................................
Menu structure – phone*.......................................................................
Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
250
252
257
262
265
266
273
276
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
10 Infotainment system
General
Infotainment system
system can be easily operated using the control panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see
page 69. The display (2) shows messages and
information on the current function.
10
Audio system
G020245
On/Off
POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/
off
Display
Keypad
MENU - Goes to the menu system
Navigation buttons
EXIT - Exits the menu system
POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio system. If the audio system is active when the
remote control key is turned to position 0 then
it continues to be active until the remote control
key is removed from the ignition switch. The
audio system is started automatically the next
time the remote control key is turned to position I.
Menus
Some infotainment system functions are controlled via a menu system. The current menu
level is shown at the top right of the display.
Menu options are shown in the middle of the
display.
• MENU (4) leads to the menu system.
• Up/down with the navigation button (5)
ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates
Infotainment is a system that integrates the
audio system and phone*. The infotainment
250
moves between menu options.
• ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
one of the menu options.
• EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu
structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the
menu system.
Shortcuts
Menu options are numbered and can also be
selected directly with the keypad (3). So first
press MENU and then the figure/figures for the
desired menu option.
Equipment
The audio system can be equipped with different options and different versions. There are
three audio system versions:
• Performance,
• High Performance* or
• Premuim Sound*
However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD
player are included in all audio systems.
10 Infotainment system
General
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ1
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ distributes the
two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right
and rear speakers. This provides a more realistic sound quality than that provided by standard two-channel stereo.
10
Dolby Surround Pro Logic IIŸ and the Dolby
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
icon
Licensing Corporation.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II SystemŸ is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
1
Premium Sound.
251
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
Audio controls
ume adjusts automatically depending on vehicle speed, see page 255.
External audio sources
AUX, USB*
10
Audio source selection
Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches
between FM1, FM2 and AM.
General
Repeatedly pressing MODE changes between
CD, USB, AUX and BT.
VOLUME - Knob
AM/FM – Audio source selection
MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX,
USB (e.g. iPodŸ)1 and BT*
TUNING - Knob
SOUND - Button
Navigation button - Menus
Volume
Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad
to regulate the volume, see page 69. Audio vol1
252
USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
AUX input
USB input*
The AUX and USB inputs enable the connection of an external audio source, e.g. an
iPodŸ1 or MP3 player.
If you choose to connect an iPodŸ, MP3 player
or a USB memory stick to the USB connection
then you can control the media via the car's
audio controls.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
Use the MODE button to select the external
audio source you wish to use.
1. If USB is selected then Connect device is
shown in the display.
2. Connect your iPodŸ, MP3 player or USB
memory stick to the USB connection in the
centre console's storage compartment
(see preceding illustration).
> The text Loading appears on the display when the system loads the file
structure on the storage media. This
takes a while.
When the loading is finished the track information is shown on the display and it is possible
to select the track required.
Track selection can take place in the following
three ways:
• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlockwise.
• Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the
navigation control to scroll to the desired
track.
NOTE
The system supports the playback of music
files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.
However, there are variants of these file formats that are not supported by the system.
The system also supports most iPodŸ models produced in 2005 or later. iPodŸ Shuffle
is not supported.
USB memory
To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid storing any files other than music files in the memory. It takes considerably longer for the system
to load storage media that contains items other
than playable music files.
NOTE
The system supports removable media
which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the
FAT32 file system, and can handle a maximum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The
memory must have a capacity of at least 256
Mb.
• With the steering wheel keypad.
MP3 player
In USB or iPodŸ mode the infotainment system
operates in an equivalent way to the
CD player for playing back music files. For
more information, see page 262.
Many MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system. For
use in the system, an MP3 player must be set
in USB Removable device/Mass Storage
Device mode.
iPodŸ
An iPodŸ is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection via the player's connection cable. However, if the player's battery
is completely discharged then it must be
charged before the player is connected.
10
NOTE
When an iPodŸ is used as audio source, the
car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPodŸ player's
own menu structure.
AUX
Sometimes the AUX external audio source can
be heard at a different volume to the internal
audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio
volume of the external audio source is too high
then the sound quality can be impaired. Prevent this by adjusting the input volume of the
AUX input.
NOTE
The sound quality may be impaired if the
player is charged while the audio system is
in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.
253
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
Streaming audio via BluetoothŸ*
10
General
If the car is equipped with BluetoothŸ handsfree* and a mobile phone is connected then the
audio system can wirelessly play back streaming audio files from the mobile phone. Navigation and control of the sound can be carried out
via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it is
also possible to change tracks from the phone.
To be able to play back the audio a device must
first be paired and connected to the car. For
information about pairing and connection, see
page 276. BT must also be selected as audio
source, see page 252.
NOTE
The BluetoothŸ mobile phone must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The phone should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
2
254
Audio settings
NOTE
Not all mobile phones available in the market are fully compatible with the
BluetoothŸ function in the car's audio system. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones and external media
players.
Press the MODE button repeatedly in order to
select BT as audio source.
Audio file selection can take place in the following three ways:
• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlockwise.
• Use the
or
button (6) of the navigation control to scroll to the desired audio
file.
Premium Sound.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
or
wheel keypad.
Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among
the following options. Adjust by turning
TUNING.
• BASS - Bass level.
• TREBLE - Treble level.
• FADER – Balance between the front and
rear speakers.
Playback
• With the
Adjusting audio settings
buttons on the steering
• BALANCE – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
• CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker.
Three channel stereo or Pro Logic IIŸ must
be activated before adjustment is possible,
see under the heading Activating/deactivating surround sound below.
• SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro
Logic IIŸ must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading
Audio settings below.
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
G021216
Surround2
Surround settings govern the spatial
perception of the sound. Settings
and activating/deactivating are separate for each audio source.
The DolbyŸ icon in the display indicates that
Dolby Pro Logic IIŸ is active. There are three
different settings for surround sound:
Equalizer front/rear4
Automatic volume control5
The equalizer can be used to adjust different
frequency bands separately.
The auto volume control function allows the
audio volume to increase as the speed of the
car increases. There are three levels to choose
from: Low, Medium and High.
Adjusting equalizer
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Adjusting automatic volume control
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
• Dolby Pro Logic II
• 3 channel
• Off - 2 channel stereo.
3. Scroll to Equalizer front… or Equalizer
rear… and press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating surround sound
5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/
down with the navigation button. Additional frequencies can be selected using
the left/right navigation button.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Surround FM…, Surround
AM…, Surround CD…or Surround
AUX… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel
or Off and press ENTER.
2
3
4
5
10
4. The graphic on the display indicates the
audio level of the frequency in question.
6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without
saving the settings.
2. Scroll to Audio settings… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Auto. volume control… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press
ENTER.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing.
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
Premium Sound.
Not available in AM and FM mode.
Certain audio systems.
Not Performance
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
10 Infotainment system
Audio functions
10
There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes
into account the position of the volume control,
radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*
are only intended for the user to be able to
adapt the sound reproduction according to
personal taste.
256
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
Tuning
Radio controls
Storing stations
Automatic tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Give a brief press on
or
.
The radio then automatically searches for the
next strong station.
Manual tuning
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
G019806
2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING
(3).
FM/AM – Wavelength selection
Station presets
TUNING – Knob for station searches
SCAN – Scanning
Navigation button - Tuning and menus
EXIT - Cancel current function
AUTO – Automatic storage of stations
or
Tune into a station with a long press on
. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:
–
or
on the navigation button
Hold in
depressed until the desired frequency
appears on the display.
As long as the frequency graphic appears on
the display, searching can be resumed by
or
.
briefly pressing
Ten station presets can be stored per wavelength. FM has two memories for presets:
FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected
using the preset buttons (2) or the steering
wheel keypad.
10
Storing stations manually
1. Tune into a station.
2. Hold a station preset button depressed
until the message Station stored appears
on the display.
Automatic storage of stations
AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio stations and stores them automatically in a separate memory. The function is especially useful
in areas where the radio stations and their frequencies are unfamiliar.
Starting automatic storage of stations
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).
2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until
Autostoring appears on the display.
Once Autostoring disappears from the display, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the
display. The automatically stored presets can
now be selected using the preset buttons (2).
Cancelling automatic storage of stations
–
Press EXIT (6).
``
257
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
10
Selecting an auto-stored preset
Scanning
RDS functions1
Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode provides access to the autostored presets.
SCAN (4) automatically searches through a
wavelength for strong stations. When a station
is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds
before scanning is resumed.
Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters
into a network. An FM transmitter in such a
network sends information that gives an
RDS radio the following functions:
Activating/deactivating Scan
• Automatically switches to a stronger trans-
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press a preset button (2).
> The radio remains in Auto mode until it
is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),
EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto
mode.
Storing autostored presets in another
memory
An autostored preset can be transferred to the
FM or AM memory.
1. Briefly press AUTO (7).
> Auto appears on the display.
2. Press the preset button for the station you
want to move.
3. Press the button under which the station
will be stored and hold it depressed until
the message Station stored appears on
the display.
> The radio exits Auto mode and the
stored station can be selected as a preset.
1
258
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
mitter if reception in the area is poor.
1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.
2. Press SCAN to activate.
> SCAN appears on the display. Close
using SCAN or EXIT.
Storing a station
A selected station can be stored as a preset
while SCAN is active.
–
Press a station preset button and hold it
depressed until the message Station
stored appears on the display.
> Scanning is interrupted and the stored
station can be selected as a preset.
•
Searches for programme form, such as
traffic information or news.
• Receives text information on current radio
programme.
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
some if its functionality.
Programme functions
In FM mode, the radio can search for stations
with certain programme types. If a required
programme type is located the radio can
switch stations interrupting the audio source
currently in use. For example, if the CD player
is in use, it is paused. The interrupting transmission is played at a preset audio volume, see
page 261. The radio returns to the previous
audio source and audio volume when the set
programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
If you want to return to the interrupted audio
source before the message or programme type
has been completed, press EXIT.
For further programme interruption settings,
see EON and REG on page 260. The programme functions are modified via the menu
system, see page 250.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears on the display
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
G021220
This function allows traffic information broadcast within a set station's
RDS network to break through. TP
shows that the function has been
activated. If the set station can send traffic
information then
appears on the display.
Activating/deactivating TP
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
TP from current station/all stations
News
The radio can interrupt with traffic information
from only the set (current) station or from all
stations.
This function allows news broadcasts within a set station's
RDS network to break through. The
message News shows that the function is active.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to TP station… and press ENTER.
> Either TP from current station or TP
from all stations is shown on the display.
6. Press ENTER.
Activating/deactivating TP search
TP search is useful during long journeys while
an audio source other than the radio is being
played. The function automatically searches
for traffic information within different
RDS networks.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
10
G021221
gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in
order of priority, where alarm has the highest
priority and programme types has the lowest.
Activating/deactivating News
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.
News from current station/all stations
The radio can interrupt with news from only the
set (current) station or from all stations.
1. Select an FM station.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
4. Scroll to News station… and press
ENTER.
> Either News from current station or
News from all stations is shown on the
display.
5. Press ENTER.
3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.
``
259
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
G021222
10
The PTY function can be used to
select different programme types,
such as Pop music and Serious
classic. The PTY symbol indicates
that the function is active. This function allows
programme types broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through.
Activating/deactivating PTY
1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Select PTY… and press ENTER.
> A list of programme types appears:
Current affairs, Information etc. The
PTY function is activated by selecting
programme types and deactivated by
clearing all PTYs.
5. Select the desired programme types or
Clear all PTY…
Search PTY
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. Activate PTY.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.
260
If the radio finds any of the selected programme types, >| To seek appears on the disto conplay. Press the navigation button
tinue searching for another broadcast of the
selected programme types.
Automatic frequency update – AF
Display of programme type
The AF function selects one of the strongest
transmitters for a set station. The radio may
sometimes need to search through the entire
FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If
this occurs, the radio mutes and PI seekEXIT
to cancel appears in the display.
The programme type of the current station can
be shown on the display.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
NOTE
Not all radio stations support this function.
Activating/deactivating display
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.
Radio text
Activating/deactivating AF
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue with a regional transmitter even
if its signal strength is low.
Regional indicates that the function
is active. The regional function is normally
deactivated.
G021223
Programme types – PTY
Some RDS stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown on the display.
Activating/deactivating REG
Activating/deactivating radio text
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Radio functions
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
Resetting RDS functions
The EON function is especially useful in urban
areas with many regional radio stations. It
allows the distance between the car and the
radio station transmitter to determine when
programme functions should interrupt the current audio source.
Resets all radio settings to the original factory
settings.
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
3. Scroll to Reset all… and press ENTER.
10
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
transmitter is close.
• Distant – interrupts if the station transmitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.
• Off – no interruption for programmes from
other transmitters.
Activating/deactivating EON
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types are heard at
the volume selected for each programme type.
If the volume level is adjusted during the programme interruption, the new level is saved
until the next programme interruption.
2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… and
press ENTER.
3. Scroll to EON… and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press
ENTER.
261
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
CD function controls
automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and
change to CD mode by pressing MODE.
10
Start playback (CD changer*)
If a CD position with a music CD is already
selected when the audio system is activated
then playback starts automatically. Otherwise
change to CD changer mode using MODE and
select a disc with the number buttons 1–6 or
Up/Down on the navigation button.
G019807
Insert a CD
Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,
track selection and menus
CD changer position selection*
CD insertion/eject
CD insertion/eject slot
MODE - Selection of audio source (CD,
AUX, USB*)
TUNING - Knob for track selection
Starting playback (CD player)
If a music CD is in the player when the audio
system is in CD mode then playback is started
262
Pause
If the volume is turned down completely, the
CD player is stopped. The player is restarted
when volume is increased.
Audio files*
The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3
and WMA format audio files.
NOTE
Certain types of copy-protected audio files
cannot be read by the player.
1. Select an empty position with buttons 1–
6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.
> An empty position is marked on the display. The text Insert disc shows that a
new disc can be inserted. The
CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.
When a CD containing audio files is inserted
into the player the disc's folder structure is loaded in. It may take a while before playback
starts due to the quality of the disc.
2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.
Navigation and playback
CD eject
If a disc with audio files is inserted in the
CD player then the disc's folder structure is
shown by pressing ENTER. The folder structure is navigated in the same way as the audio
system's menu structure. Audio files have the
and folders have the symbol
.
symbol
Start audio file playback with ENTER.
A CD will stay in the ejected position for
approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is reinserted in the player and playback continues.
Eject individual discs by pressing the eject button (3).
Eject all discs with a long press on the eject
button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by
disc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in the
display.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
When the playback of a file is finished the playback of the other files in the same folder continues. Folder change takes place automati-
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
cally when all files in the current folder have
been played back.
Press left/right on the navigation button if the
display is not wide enough to show the whole
audio file name.
Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio
files
Short presses right/left on the navigation button are used to scroll between
CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used
to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or
the steering wheel keypad) can also be used
for this purpose.
Scan CD
This function plays the first 10 seconds of each
CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.
Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue playback of the current CD track/audio file.
Random
This function plays the tracks in random order.
The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrolled through in the normal way.
NOTE
It is only possible to scroll between random
CD tracks 1 on the current disc.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
changer)
If a normal music CDis being played:
10
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Different messages appear on the display
depending on which random function has been
selected:
• RANDOM means that the tracks from only
one music CD are played
• RND ALL means that all tracks on all
music CDs in the CD changer are played.
• RND FLD means that the audio files in a
folder on the current CD are played.
Activating/deactivating, random (CD
player)
If a normal music CD is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press
ENTER.
The option All discs only applies to the music
CDs in the changer.
If a CD with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press
ENTER.
The function is deactivated when another CD
is selected.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
If a disc with audio files is being played:
1. Press MENU and then ENTER.
Disc text
If title information is stored on a music CD then
it can be shown on the display2.
2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.
Activate/deactivate
3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press
ENTER.
1. Start CD playback.
2. Press MENU and then ENTER.
3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.
1
2
Applies to the CD changer.
Applies to CD changer.
263
10 Infotainment system
CD functions
CDs
10
Using low quality CD discs could result in poor
or non-existent sound.
IMPORTANT
Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).
Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc
labels. The heat in the CD player may cause
the label to come off, damaging the
CD player.
264
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – audio system
Overview
FM MENU1
News
4.
TP
1.
AUX input volume…
5.
Disc text
2.
News
6.*
Audio settings…
3.
TP
4.*
Audio settings…
1.
News
2.
TP
3.
PTY…
4.
Radio text
5.
Advanced radio settings…
For CD changer* with CD disc
selected.
6.*
Audio settings…
1.
Random…
2.
News
3.
TP
4.
Disc text
5.*
Audio settings…
AM MENU
1.*
Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with CD disc.
1.
Random
2.
News
3.
TP
4.
Disc text
5.*
Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD player with MP3 disc.
1
3.
1.
Playlist
2.
Random…
CD MENU
AUX MENU
10
USB MENU*
1.
Playlist
2.
Random…
3.
News
4.
TP
5.
Track information
6.
Audio settings…
CD MENU
For CD changer* with MP3 disc
selected.
1.
Playlist
2.
Random…
3.
News
4.
TP
5.
Disc text
6.*
Audio settings…
The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
10
Phone system components.
266
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Antenna1
Steering wheel keypad. Most phone system functions can be accessed via the keypad. see page 268.
Microphone. The microphone for handsfree is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.
Emergency calls
1. Activate the phone.
2. Ring the emergency number that applies to
your region (within EU: 112).
3. Press ENTER.
SIM card reader
IDIS
• Always put traffic safety first.
• Switch off the phone system when refuelling the car.
• Switch off the system near blasting work.
• Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop carries out phone system
servicing.
With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver
Information System), incoming phone calls and
SMS messages can be delayed so that concentration can be focused on driving when IDIS
determines that the traffic situation requires a
high level of attention.
Incoming calls and SMS messages can be
delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If
the current traffic situation still requires a high
level of attention from the driver then the
incoming call is diverted to the voice mail.
Missed calls are shown in the display.
IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5,
see page 273.
1
10
Making an emergency call
Centre console control panel. All phone
functions (except call volume) can be regulated via the control panel.
General
SIM card
Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made
without a SIM card as long as there is coverage
by a network operator.
G020244
Phone system components
The phone can only be used with a valid SIM
card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are
available from various network operators. Contact your network operator if you experience
difficulties with the SIM card.
NOTE
The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM
cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards
work. Contact your network operator if a
replacement SIM card is required.
Available only for built-in phone or RTI.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Extra SIM card
10
Phone controls
Steering wheel keypad
Many network operators offer two SIM cards
for the same phone number. The extra SIM
card can be used in the car.
Inserting the SIM card
1. Switch off the phone and open the glovebox.
4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.
G019809
3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the
metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of
the SIM card should align with the bevel of
the SIM card holder.
Centre console control panel.
Menus
Page 273 describes how to control phone
functions with the menu system.
VOLUME - Control the background volume from the radio, for example, during a
call
Number and letter buttons
When the phone is active, the steering wheel
keypad is locked to phone functions. To control the audio system, the phone must be in
standby mode (standby).
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the button reveals latest dialled numbers.
Traffic safety
MENU - Opens the main menu
For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu
system cannot be accessed at speeds in
excess of 8 km/h.
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered characters
EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered characters. Changes between the audio menu
and the phone menu.
Navigation button – Scroll in menus and
character rows
Call volume – Increase/decrease
ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the button reveals latest dialled numbers
PHONE - On/off and standby mode
268
G020243
2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM
card reader, see illustration on page 267.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
On/Off
Activating from standby mode
A handset appears in the display when the
phone system is active or in standby mode
(standby). If the remote control key is turned to
position 0 when the phone is in one of these
modes, the phone automatically resumes this
mode the next time the remote control key is
turned to position I or II.
–
Activating the phone system
Phone system functions can only be used
when the phone is in active mode.
1. Press PHONE.
2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press
ENTER.
Deactivating the phone system
No calls can be received when the phone system is deactivated.
–
Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is
deactivated.
2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and press
ENTER.
Press PHONE.
10
Dialling a third party
Making and receiving calls
1. Put the call on hold.
To call
2. Dial the number of the third party.
1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 271.
Starting a conference call
Receiving a call
A conference call consists of three parties that
can talk to one another. Once a conference call
has been initiated, no more parties can be connected. All calls are ended when a conference
call is ended.
For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see
page 273.
Press ENTER.
Ending a call
–
1. Start two phone calls.
Press EXIT.
2. Press MENU or ENTER.
Refusing a call
–
3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.
Press EXIT.
Standby mode (standby)
Call waiting
In standby mode, the audio system can be in
use while calls are received. However, it is not
possible to make calls when in standby mode.
A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates
that there is another incoming call. Answer? is
shown in the display. The call can be refused
or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming
call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.
Putting the phone in standby mode
The phone must first be in active mode before
it can be put in standby mode.
–
Press PHONE.
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.
3. Press ENTER.
–
Switching between calls
Putting a call on hold/resuming a call
1. Press MENU or ENTER.
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
Volume
10
The phone uses the driver's door speaker.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered
characters.
Key
Function
[email protected]*#&$£/%
Call volume
Call volume is regulated with
the steering wheel keypad.
Key
Function
Switch between upper and
lower case.
space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )
abc2äåàæç
Audio system volume
Audio system volume is temporarily lowered
during a phone call. Once the call is ended the
previous volume is resumed. If the volume is
regulated during the call, the new level is
retained once the call is ended. Sound can also
be automatically muted during a phone call,
see menu 6.4.3, on page 273. This function
only applies to the Volvo integrated phone system.
Entering text
def3èé
ghi4ì
jkl5
2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a
row are to be entered using the same button, press * or wait a few seconds.
270
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Calling the last number dialled
The phone automatically stores the last phone
numbers dialled.
1. Press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.
Phonebook
mno6ñöòØ
pqrs7ß
tuv8üù
If the phone book contains a live caller's contact information then this is shown in the display. Contact information can be stored on the
SIM card and in the phone.
Storing contacts in the phone book
1. Press MENU.
Text is entered using the phone keypad.
1. Press the key with the desired character once for the first character on the button,
twice for the second, etc. See table.
Handling numbers
wxyz9
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after
each other with the same
key.
3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.
4. Enter a name and press ENTER.
5. Enter a number and press ENTER.
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and
press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
6. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
Searching for contacts in the phone book
5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press
ENTER.
7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Use the down arrow of the navigation button
instead of MENU for direct access to the
Search menu.
1. Press MENU.
6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.
8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu
system.
Erase all contacts
Calling using speed dial
1. Press MENU.
–
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and
press ENTER.
4. Enter the first few letters of the item and
press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.
Copying entries between the SIM card
and Phone book
If required, enter phone code. The factory-set
default code is 1234.
Speed dial
1. Press MENU.
A keypad button (1–9) can be used as a speed
dial number for a contact in the phone book.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM
and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Speed dial… and press ENTER.
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
Briefly press the required keypad button,
followed by ENTER.
NOTE
It takes a short time before speed dialling
becomes available after the phone has been
activated.
To use the speed dial function Speed dial…
must be activated in the Phone book… menu,
see page 275.
Calling from the phone book
3. Scroll to Copy all… and press ENTER.
Deleting contacts from the phone book
10
1. Press MENU.
4. Scroll to Select numbers and press
ENTER.
5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for
the speed dial number and press ENTER.
2. Scroll to Phone book… and press
ENTER.
> All contacts in the phone book memory
are displayed. The number of contacts
displayed can be reduced by entering
part of the contact's name.
3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
10 Infotainment system
Phone functions*
NOTE
10
Press ENTER to dial.
SMS - Short Message Service
Reading SMS
1. Press MENU.
NOTE
Hold in the required letter/button in the keypad for about 2 seconds to reach the corresponding letter in the phone book.
Functions during a call
Several functions are available during a call.
Some functions can only be used when a call
is on hold.
2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.
> The message text is shown in the display. Additional selections can be made
by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT
depressed to leave the menu system.
Specifications
1. Press MENU.
2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.
1. Mute microphone/Microphone on –
Mute mode.
4. Enter text and press ENTER.
Output
2W
SIM card
Small
Memory entries
250A
SMS (Short Message Service)
Yes
Data/Fax
No
Dualband (900/1800 MHz)
Yes
3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.
5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.
6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.
3. Phone book – Show phone book.
4. Join – – Conference calling (available if
more than two parties are connected).
5. Swap – Switch between two calls (available if up to three parties are connected).
272
To block the phone, you must provide your
network operator with the phone's IMEI number. This is a 15 digit serial number that is programmed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show
this number in the display. Write it down and
keep it in a safe place.
Writing and sending
Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access
the In-call menu and scroll to one of the following alternatives:
2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or
resume a call.
IMEI number
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are
available on the SIM card.
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
Phone menu
1.
Speed dial…
4.6.2.
When busy
Call register…
2.4.1.
Active
4.6.3.
Not answered
1.1.
Last 10 missed calls
2.4.2.
Select numbers
4.6.4.
Not reachable
1.2.
Last 10 received calls
2.5.
Erase SIM
4.6.5.
Fax calls
1.3.
Last 10 dialled calls
2.6.
Erase phone
4.6.6.
Data calls
1.4.
Erase list…
2.7.
Memory status
4.6.7.
Cancel all
1.5.
2.
1
2.4.
1.4.1.
All calls
1.4.2.
Missed calls
3.1.
Read
5.1.
Carphone
1.4.3.
Received calls
3.2.
Write new
5.2.
Add phone
1.4.4.
Dialled numbers
3.3.
Message settings…
5.3.
Added phones1
3.
Messages…
5.
Call duration…
3.3.1.
SMSC number
1.5.1.
Last call
3.3.2.
Validity time…
1.5.2.
Call count
3.3.3.
Message type…
1.5.3.
Total time
1.5.4.
Reset timers
4
Call options…
4.1.
Send my number
Phone book…
4.2.
Call waiting
2.1.
4.3.
Automatic answer
Search
2.2.
New contact
4.4.
Auto re-dial
2.3.
Copy all…
4.5.
Voice mail number
2.3.1.
SIM to phone
4.6.
Diversions…
2.3.2.
Phone to SIM
4.6.1.
All calls
10
Change phone
NOTE
The menu above only applies to cars with
BluetoothTM handsfree.
6.
Phone settings…
6.1.
6.2.
Network selection…
6.1.1.
Automatic
6.1.2.
Manual select
SIM security…
6.2.1.
On
6.2.2.
Off
A maximum of 3 phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
6.2.3.
10
Automatic
All calls
2.4. Speed dial
A number stored in the phone book can be
stored as a speed dial number.
6.3.
Edit PIN code
1.4.2.
Missed calls
6.4.
Sounds and volume…
1.4.3.
Received calls
6.4.1.
Ring volume
1.4.4.
Dialled numbers
6.4.2.
Ring signals…
1.5. Call duration
6.4.3.
Mute radio
6.4.4.
Message beep
Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.
To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.
1.5.1.
Last call
1.5.2.
Call count
1.5.3.
Total time
Description of menu options
1.5.4.
Reset timers
1. Call register
2. Phone book
6.5.
IDIS
6.6.
Reset phone settings
2.4.1
Active
2.4.2
Select numbers
2.5. Erase SIM
Erase the entire SIM card memory.
2.6. Erase phone
Erase the entire phone memory.
2.7. Memory status
Shows how many positions are occupied in the
SIM card and phone memory. The table shows
how many of the total number of positions are
occupied, e.g. 100 (250).
1.1. Last 10 missed
2.1. Search
3. Messages
List of missed calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
Search for a name in the phone book.
3.1. Read
2.2. New contact
1.2. Last 10 received
Store names and phone numbers in the phone
book, see page 270.
Received text messages. Select whether to
erase, forward, change or save the entire message or parts of it.
2.3. Copy all
3.2. Write new
Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM
card to the phone memory.
Write a message using the keypad. Choose
whether to save or send it.
2.3.1.
SIM to phone
3.3. Message settings
2.3.2.
Phone to SIM
List of received calls. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.3. Last 10 dialled
List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,
erase or store the number in the phone book.
1.4. Erase list
Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and
1.3 as below.
274
1.4.1.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Enter the number (SMSC number) of the message centre to which messages are to be transferred as well as how long they are to be saved
at the message centre. Contact your network
10 Infotainment system
Menu structure – phone*
operator for information on message settings.
Normally, these settings should not be altered.
3.3.1.
SMSC number
3.3.2.
Validity time…
3.3.3.
Message type…
4. Call settings
4.1. Send my number
4.6.2
When busy
6.1.2.
4.6.3.
Not answered
6.2. SIM security
4.6.4.
Not reachable
4.6.5.
Fax calls
Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the
phone should automatically give the PIN code.
4.6.6.
Data calls
4.6.7.
Cancel all
5. Change phone
Manual select
6.2.1.
On
6.2.2.
Off
6.2.3.
Automatic
Displays or hides your phone number to/from
the person you call. Contact your network
operator regarding ex-directory numbers.
Select the built-in phone.
4.2. Call waiting
5.2. Add phone
6.4. Sounds and volume
Be alerted during a phone call that there is
another incoming call.
Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.
6.4.1.
5.3. Added phones
Adjust the ring tone volume.
4.3. Auto answer
Select to connect to one of the added phones
(up to 3 phones).
6.4.2.
Automatically answers incoming calls.
4.5. Voice mail number
6.3. Edit PIN code
5.1. Car phone
Change PIN code. Write down and save the
code in a safe place.
Ring volume
Ring signals…
There are seven different ring tones.
4.4. Auto redial
Automatically calls a previously engaged number.
NOTE
6.4.3.
The menu above only applies to cars with
BluetoothTM handsfree.
Mute radio
The radio can be switched off/on.
6.4.4.
Stores voice mail number.
Message beep
4.6. Call divert
6. Phone settings
6.5. IDIS
Choose when and what type of calls are to be
diverted to a specified phone number.
6.1. Selecting network
If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming
calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving
situation.
4.6.1.
All calls
This setting only applies during the call in progress.
10
Choose a network automatically or manually.
The selected network is shown in the display in
the phone's basic mode.
6.1.1.
Automatic
6.6. Reset phone settings
Reset the system's factory settings.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
General
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
10
Menus and controls
The menus are navigated using the control
panel in the centre console (3), see page 268.
Remember
System overview.
The menus are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad. For general information on menus, see page 273.
Mobile phone
NOTE
Microphone
Centre console
BluetoothTM
A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM
can be connected wirelessly to the audio system. The audio system then works handsfree,
with the option to control a range of the mobile
phone's functions remotely. The microphone is
fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone
can always be operated by its own keys irrespective of whether or not it is connected.
276
If the car is equipped with both
BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone
then there is an additional menu in the
phone menu, see page 273.
Activate/deactivate
A short press on PHONE activates the handsfree function. The text PHONE at the top of the
display shows that it is in phone mode. The
symbol
shows that the handsfree function is active.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
One long press on PHONE deactivates the
handsfree function and disconnects a connected phone.
Connect mobile phone
A mobile phone is connected in different ways
depending on whether or not it has been connected previously. To connect a mobile phone
for the first time, follow the instructions below:
Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system
1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible
via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's
manual or www.volvocars.com.
2. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE.
> Menu option Add phone appears on
the display. If one or more mobile
phones have already been registered
then these are also shown.
3. Select Add phone.
> The audio system searches for mobile
phones in the vicinity. The search takes
approximately 30 seconds. The mobile
phones detected are specified with their
respective BluetoothTM name in the display. The handsfree function's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the
mobile phone as My Volvo Car.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the
audio system display.
the mobile phone can be controlled from the
audio system.
5. Enter the number series shown in the audio
system display via the mobile phone keypad.
To call
NOTE
Some mobile phones require that the transfer from handsfree is confirmed from the
mobile phone's keypad.
1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown
at the top of the display and that the
symbol is visible.
Making and receiving calls
1. Activate the handsfree function with
PHONE. If there is a phone connected,
disconnect the connected phone.
2. Dial the number or use the phone book,
see page 279.
Incoming call
2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see
the mobile phone's manual.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system
3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of units
detected in your mobile phone.
4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile
phone when prompted for the PIN code.
5. Select to connect to My Volvo Car from
the mobile phone.
The mobile phone is registered and connected
automatically to the audio system while the text
Synchronising is shown in the display. For
more information on how mobile phones are
registered, see page 278.
When the connection is established the symbol
is shown and the mobile phone's
BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now
1
3. Press ENTER.
Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the
audio system is in CD or FM mode for example.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Auto answer
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's
range. For more information on connection,
see page 278.
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically. Activate/
deactivate under Phone Menu… Call
options… Automatic answer.
Manual disconnection takes place by deactivating the handsfree function with one long
press on PHONE. The handsfree function is
also deactivated when the engine is switched
off or when a door is opened1.
Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call
to access the following functions:
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued with
the mobile phone's built-in microphone and
speaker.
10
In-call menu
• Mute microphone - audio system microphone is muted.
• Transfer call to mobile - the call is transferred to the mobile phone.
Applies to Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
NOTE
With certain mobile phones the connection
is terminated when the privacy function is
used. This is normal. The handsfree function
asks if you want to reconnect.
10
Ring volume
More on registering and connecting
Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings…
Sounds and volume… Ring volume and
adjust with
/
on the navigation button.
A maximum of 3 mobile phones can be registered. Registration is performed once per
phone. After registration the mobile phone is in
the list of added phones. Not more than one
mobile phone can be connected at a time.
Phones can be deregistered under Phone
Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone.
Ring signals
• Phone book – searching in the phone
book.
NOTE
A new call cannot be started during an
ongoing call.
The handsfree function has integrated ring signals that can be selected under Phone
Menu… Phone settings… Sounds and
volume… Ring signals… Ring signal 1
etc.
NOTE
Audio settings
Call volume
Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use
the steering wheel keypad.
Audio system volume
In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system volume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.
The connected mobile phone's ring signal is
not deactivated when one of the handsfree
system's integrated signals is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal2, go to Phone Menu… Phone
settings… Sounds and volume… Ring
signals… Use mobile phone signal.
The audio source can be automatically muted
for incoming calls under Phone Menu…
Phone settings… Sounds and volume…
Mute radio.
2
278
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. When the audio system searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the display. To change over
to manual connection of another phone, press
EXIT.
Manual connection
If you want to connect a mobile phone other
than the last connected or change the connected mobile phone, proceed as follows:
Set the audio system in phone mode
(PHONE) and follow the instructions on the
display or change the connected mobile phone
by using the menu system as described below.
The menu structure is available in two variants
depending on whether the car only has
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-in
phone.
• For cars with only BluetoothTM the connection is made under Phone Menu…
Bluetooth… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously connected phones.
• For cars with built-in phone and
BluetoothTM the connection is made under
Phone Menu… Change phone Add
phone or select one of the previously connected phones.
Phonebook
All use of the phone book presupposes that the
text PHONE is shown at the top of the display
and that the
symbol is visible.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each registered mobile phone. The
phone book is copied automatically to the
audio system during each connection. Deactivate the function under Phone settings…
Synchronise phone book. Searching for contacts is only performed in the connected
mobile phone's phone book.
NOTE
NOTE
If the mobile phone does not support copying of the phone book then List is empty is
shown when copying is finished.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
display.
Searching for contacts
The easiest way to search in the phone book is
with long presses on the keys 2–9. This starts
a search in the phone book based on the key's
first letter.
/
The phone book can also be reached with
on the navigation button or with
/
on
the steering wheel keypad. The search can also
be performed from the phone book's Search
menu under Phone book… Search:
1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and
press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.
2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to
call.
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the voice recognition function. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer or visit
www.volvocars.com for information on
compatible phones.
10
Voice mail number
The number to the voice mail is changed under
Call options… Voice mail number. If no
number is stored then this menu is reached
with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time
to use the stored number.
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. Press ENTER
to show the last dialled. Other call lists are
available under Call register….
NOTE
Certain mobile phones show a list of the last
dialled numbers in reverse order.
Voice recognition
The mobile phone's voice recognition function
for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.
Inputting text
Input text using the keypad in the centre console. Press once for the key's first character,
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for
more characters, see the table on page 270.
10
3.
3.1.
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. One long press on EXIT clears all input
/
on the navigation button
characters.
scrolls between the characters.
3.1.2.
3.2.
4.
NOTE
2.
3
280
Last 10 missed calls
1.2.
Last 10 received calls
1.3.
Last 10 dialled calls
1.
Remove phone
3.4.
Car Bluetooth info
2.
Call options…
Automatic answer
Voice mail number
3.
Phone settings…
5.1.
Sounds and volume…
5.1.1.
Call register…
1.1.
Menu structure - BluetoothTM
handsfree with built-in phone
Added phones3
Connect fr. mobile phone
4.2.
5.
Add phone
3.3.
4.1.
BluetoothTM
The menu for
handsfree is
available in two variants. For cars with only
BluetoothTM handsfree and for cars with
built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.
Change phone
3.1.1.
Menu structure BluetoothTMhandsfree
1.
Bluetooth…
5.2.
Ring volume
5.1.2.
Ring signals…
5.1.3.
Mute radio
4.
Synchronise phone book
5.
Call register…
1.1.
Last 10 missed calls
1.2.
Last 10 received calls
1.3.
Last 10 dialled calls
Phone book…
2.1.
Search
2.2.
Copy fr. mobile phone
Bluetooth…
3.1.
Remove phone
3.2.
Connect fr. mobile phone
3.3.
Car Bluetooth info
Call options…
4.1.
Automatic answer
4.2.
Voice mail number
Change phone
Phone book…
5.1.
Carphone
2.1.
Search
5.2.
Add phone
2.2.
Copy fr. mobile phone
5.3.
Added phones3
A maximum of 3 phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
10 Infotainment system
Bluetooth handsfree*
6.
Phone settings…
6.1.
6.2.
Sounds and volume…
6.1.1.
Ring volume
6.1.2.
Ring signals…
6.1.3.
Mute radio
10
Synchronise phone book
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
Type designation...................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure .........................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
Symbols in the display..........................................................................
282
284
286
289
290
292
295
298
300
302
303
SPECIFICATIONS
11 Specifications
Type designation
11
284
11 Specifications
Type designation
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible when
the right door is opened.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual are
not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the label
in question in your car.
11
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number:
manual gearbox
,
automatic gearbox
The car's identification number (VIN –
Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
285
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
11
Dimensions
A
286
Wheelbase
mm
2640
B
Length
4266
C
Load length, floor,
folded seat
1486
D
Load length, floor
663
E
Load height
642
F
Height
Dimensions
G
Front track
mm
1548A
mm
K
Width including door
mirrors
2039
L
Width including foldedin door mirrors
1871
1535B
H
Rear track
1544A
1531B
1447
Dimensions
I
Load width, floor
J
Width
713
1782 (1797C)
A
B
C
with 15" wheel
with 16" and 17" wheels
with Keyless drive*
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see
table) influences the payload and is not
included in the kerb weight.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
11
Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle
weight - Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This
means that for every accessory added the
loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory.
For decal location, see page 284.
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as other
accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,
Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,
GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.
Max. total weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
Equipment level
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
287
11 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Towing capacity and towball load
11
288
Engine
Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg)
Maximum towball load (kg)
DRIVe
1300
75
D2
1300
75
2.0F
1350
75
2.0
1350
75
others
1500
75
Engine
Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg)
Maximum towball load (kg)
2.0, D2 and DRIVe
650
50
others
700
50
11 Specifications
Engine specifications
Overview
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
11
A
Engine
Engine
codeA
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Compression
ratio
2.0F
B4204S4
107/6000
145/6000
185/4500
4
87.5
83.1
1.999
10.8:1
2.0
B4204S3
107/6000
145/6000
185/4500
4
87.5
83.1
1.999
10.8:1
T5
B5254T7
169/5000
230/5000
320/1500 – 5000
5
83
93.2
2.521
9.0:1
DRIVe
D4162T
84/3600
115/3600
270/1750-2500
4
75
88.3
1.560
16.0:1
D2
D4162T
84/3600
115/3600
270/1750-2500
4
75
88.3
1.560
16.0:1
D3
D5204T5
110/3500
150/3500
350/1500-2750
5
81
77
1.984
16.5:1
D4
D5204T
130/3500
177/3500
400/1750-2750
5
81
77
1.984
16.5:1
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 284.
289
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
11
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard to
service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
290
11 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
Engine
Engine code
Recommended oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
2.0F
B4204S4
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 4.3
2.0
B4204S3
Viscosity: SAE 5W–30
approx. 4.3
DRIVe
D4162T
approx. 3.8
D2
D4162T
approx. 3.8
D4
D5204T
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 5.9
D3
D5204T5
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
T5
B5254T7
11
approx. 5.8
For filling engine oil, see page 222.
291
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Overview
IMPORTANT
11
The recommended transmission fluid must
be used to prevent damage to the gearbox.
Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.
If the transmission is topped up with a different fluid, contact a workshop nearby for
servicing. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Gearbox oil
Manual gearbox
B6
1.6
MTX75
1.8
M66
1.9
Automatic gearbox
292
Volume (litres)
Volume (litres)
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
Prescribed transmission fluid
MPS6
7.3
BOT 341
AW55-51
7.7
JWS 3309
TF-80SC
7.0
AW1
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Fluids
Fluid
System
Coolant
2.0 and 2.0F
6.5
T5, manual gearbox
7.0
T5, automatic
gearbox
7.5
D2 and DRIVe
6.2
D3 and D4
8.5
Refrigerant
Air conditioning
Volume
(litres)
Recommended oil grade
Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostat
starts opening at:
petrol engines 90 °C
11
diesel engines 82 °C
diesel engine (D2) 83 °C
B
R134a (HFC134a)
Oil: PAG
Brake fluid
Brake system
0.6
Power steering fluid
Power steering
Washer fluid
4-cyl. Petrol/Diesel
4.0
5-cyl. Petrol/Diesel
6.5
0.8 – 0.9
DOT 4+
WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product with same specifications.
Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below
freezing point.
``
293
11 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
11
A
B
294
Fluid
System
Volume
(litres)
Fuel
Petrol: 2.0, 2.0F
approx. 55
Petrol: T5
approx. 62
Diesel: D2 and
DRIVe
approx. 52
Diesel: D3 and D4
approx. 60
Recommended oil grade
Petrol: see page 143
Diesel: see page 144
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.
11 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
2.0F
254 (242A)
10.9 (14.8A)
137 (135A)
5.9 (8.2A)
180 (174A)
7.7 (10.6A)
2.0
252
10.8
134
5.8
177
7.6
T5
294
12.6
150
6.4
203
8.7
T5
315
13.5
151
6.5
211
9.0
D2B, C
109
4.2
86
3.3
94
3.6
D2D
139
5.3
100
3.8
114
4.3
D3
178
6.8
109
4.2
134
5.1
D3
210
7.9
122
4.6
154
5.8
11
``
295
11 Specifications
Fuel
D4
178
6.8
109
4.2
134
5.1
D4
210
7.9
122
4.6
154
5.8
11
A
B
C
D
E85
DRIVe for certain markets.
With Start/Stop.
Without Start/Stop.
Explanation
gram/km
litre/100 km
Urban driving
Extra-urban driving
Combined driving
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic
version and without extra equipment. The car's
weight may increase depending on equipment.
This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,
increases fuel consumption and carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
• The driver's driving style.
• If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the model's basic version, then resistance increases.
• High speed results in increased wind resistance.
• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
1
296
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation
no 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting
the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with a D2 engine and 6-speed manual
transmission with Start/Stop is started in 2nd gear. - The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving.
CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
11 Specifications
Fuel
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise
in a comparison with the EU driving cycles
which are used in the certification of the car
and on which the consumption figures in the
table are based.
11
To bear in mind
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary acceleration as well as braking too hard.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre
pressure table on page 298.
• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
See further information and more advice on
pages 13 and 140.
See page 142 for general information on fuel.
297
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved tyre pressures
Engine
Tyre size
Speed (km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
Front (kPa) A
Rear (kPa)
Front (kPa)
Rear (kPa)
ECO pressureB
0–160
230
210
270
270
270
160+
250
210
280
260
-
0–160
230
210
250
250
250
160+
250
210
280
260
-
0–160
240
220
250
250
250
160+
260
220
280
260
-
195/65 R15
0–160
230
210
250
250
250
2.0
205/55 R16
160+
250
210
280
260
-
2.0F
205/50 R17
0–160
240
220
250
250
250
215/45 R18
160+
260
220
280
260
-
195/65 R15
11
D2
DRIVe
205/55 R16
205/50 R17
298
11 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Engine
T5
Tyre size
Speed (km/h)
Load, 1 - 3 persons
Max. load
Front (kPa) A
Rear (kPa)
Front (kPa)
Rear (kPa)
ECO pressureB
0–160
230
210
250
250
250
160+
260
210
280
260
-
205/50 R17
0–160
240
220
250
250
250
215/45 R18
160+
270
220
290
270
-
0–80
420
420
420
420
-
205/55 R16
D3
D4
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
11
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Economical driving,see page 196
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
299
11 Specifications
Electrical system
General
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The electrical system is single-pole and uses
the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
11
The battery capacity is dependent upon the
equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter
battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure
that you switch to a battery with the same
capacity as the original battery (see the label
on the battery).
Battery
Voltage (V)
Cold start capacity,
Reserve capacity
CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)
(minutes)
Capacity (Ah)
590
100
60
760A
120
70
700 B
135
80
12
12
A
B
Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.
Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.
Bulbs
Lighting
300
Output (W)
Type
Dipped beam, halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, halogen
65
H9
Extra main beam, ABL
55
H7 LL
Front direction indicators
24
PY24W SV
Position/parking lamps, front
5
W5W LL BV
11 Specifications
Electrical system
Lighting
Output (W)
Type
Side marker lamps, front
5
WY5W LL
Fog lamps
35
H8
Side direction indicators, door mirrors
5
WY5W LL
Front courtesy lighting
3
T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting
3
T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d
Vanity mirror lighting*
2
T5 Socket W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting
5
Socket SV8.5 Length 38 mm
Number plate lighting
5
C5W LL
Rear direction indicators
21
PY21W LL
Position lamps, rear
4
P21/4W LL
Brake light
21
P21W LL
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
P21/4W LL
11
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
301
11 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system
Lock system standard
Country
Keyless locking system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
EU
11
Korea
Korea
Hong Kong
Singapore, China
Singapore, China
302
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
General
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols
with their meanings and a reference to where
in the manual further information can be found.
For more information on symbols and text
messages, see pages 48 and 52.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when
a fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time.
- Yellow information symbol, illuminates
in combination with text in the information display, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with
other symbols.
Symbols in the display
Symbol
Indicator and warning symbols in the
combined instrument panel
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Warning
19, 30, 48, 51,
159
Information
48, 51, 159,
168, 170
Emissions
system
48, 49
Fault in the
ABS system
49, 50
Rear fog lamp
49
Meaning
Page
Stability system, DSTC*
49, 167, 168
Engine preheater (diesel)
49
Low level in
fuel tank
49
Indicator
symbol for
trailer
50
Parking brake
applied
50
Airbags - SRS
19, 50
11
``
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
303
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Page
Low oil pressure
48, 50
Seatbelt
reminder
16, 50
Alternator not
charging
50
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Left direction
indicators
47
Right direction indicators
Information symbols in the centre
console display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Surround sound (only
Premium Sound)
255
47
News
259
Programme types
259
Regional radio programmes
260
Audio files
262
Directory in CD disc
262
Traffic information
259
Phone*
276
BluetoothTM handsfree*
276
G021221
11
Meaning
G021216
Symbol
Symbol
50, 165
Main beam
indicator
47
Page
Rain sensor*
65
Cruise control*
67
G021223
Fault in brake
system
Meaning
G021222
Other information symbols in the
combined instrument panel
155
G021220
Gear shift indicator*
304
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Seatbelt reminder
17
11
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
22, 23
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
23
305
12 Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
electronic climate control..................... 95
manual climate control................... 90, 91
ABS fault............................................ 49, 166
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 58
Active headlamps...................................... 58
12
Adaptation............................................... 153
Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 100
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 188
halogen headlamp.............................. 188
AF – automatic frequency update........... 260
Airbag........................................................
activating/deactivating, PACOS...........
driver's and front passenger side.........
key switch off........................................
20
22
21
22
AIRBAG ..................................................... 20
Airbag system............................................ 20
Air conditioning.......................................... 90
ECC...................................................... 93
general.................................................. 88
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 221
306
Air distribution............................................ 96
ECC...................................................... 94
Auto
climate control settings........................ 93
Air distribution, A/C................................... 91
Air quality system, ECC............................. 94
AUTO
storing stations................................... 257
Air vents..................................................... 88
Auto climate............................................... 93
Alarm........................................................
alarm indicator....................................
alarm signals.......................................
arming.................................................
automatic alarm activation.................
deactivating a triggered alarm............
disarming............................................
RDS traffic warning.............................
reduced alarm level............................
testing the alarm system....................
Automatic car washes............................. 208
135
135
136
135
136
136
135
259
136
136
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 156
towing and recovery........................... 174
trailer........................................... 179, 180
Automatic locking.................................... 133
Automatic relocking................................. 132
Autostart.................................................. 150
Auto volume control................................ 255
Alcolock................................................... 146
Auxiliary heater........................................ 100
Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 130
Average fuel consumption......................... 62
Approach light, duration.................... 76, 124
setting................................................... 81
Armrest in the rear seat .......................... 117
B
Audio, see also Sound............................. 252
Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 116
Audio volume
phone.......................................... 270, 278
phone/media player............................ 278
programme types............................... 261
ring signal, phone............................... 278
Bass speaker........................................... 254
Battery............................................. 230, 300
changing the battery in the remote control key................................................ 131
12 Alphabetical Index
maintenance............................... 219, 230
overload.............................................. 141
specifications...................................... 300
start assistance................................... 178
symbols on the battery....................... 230
warning symbols................................. 230
emergency brake lights...................... 166
handbrake............................................. 71
Car upholstery......................................... 209
Brake system........................................... 165
Catalytic converter................................... 143
recovery.............................................. 174
Bioethanol E85........................................ 143
Bulbs
changing............................................. 234
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 171
Bulb holder
removal............................................... 237
Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 234, 300
BLIS................................................... 77, 171
Bluetooth
handsfree............................................ 276
mute microphone............................... 277
transfer call to mobile......................... 277
BluetoothŸ
media.................................................. 254
streaming audio.................................. 254
C
Calls
functions during a call................ 269, 272
incoming............................................. 277
operation..................................... 269, 277
volume in phone................................. 270
Car care................................................... 208
Bonnet, opening...................................... 220
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 210
Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 226
Cargo area...............................................
cargo cover.........................................
lighting................................................
loading................................................
safety net............................................
Brakes
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 166
brake light............................................. 60
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 166
CD discs
storage compartment......................... 114
CD functions............................................ 262
Checking the engine oil level................... 222
Checks
fluids and oils...................................... 222
Boarding
rear seat.............................................. 105
Brake light.................................................. 60
Car wash.................................................. 208
118
118
109
187
120
Children.....................................................
child seats and side airbags.................
location in the car.................................
location in the car, table.......................
safety....................................................
12
31
24
31
32
31
Child seat................................................... 31
Child seats.................................................
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . .
size classes for child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system.................................
upper mounting points for child seats..
31
36
36
39
Cigarette lighter socket
front seat............................................... 54
Cargo cover............................................. 118
Car settings............................................... 81
307
12 Alphabetical Index
Cleaning
car wash.............................................
rims.....................................................
seatbelts.............................................
upholstery...........................................
208
208
211
209
Climate control
general.................................................. 88
personal preferences............................ 80
12
Climate control settings
auto....................................................... 93
Door mirrors............................................... 76
Cooling system........................................ 140
Driving
cooling system....................................
economical.........................................
in water...............................................
slippery driving conditions..................
with trailer...........................................
Crash, see Collision................................... 30
Cruise control............................................ 67
D
Driver's door control panel.................. 46, 72
140
140
140
141
179
Driving in water........................................ 140
Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 226
Deadlock
deactivation........................................ 133
temporary deactivation....................... 133
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 287
towing capacity.................................. 287
Coat hanger............................................. 113
Deadlocks................................................ 133
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 167
Cold start................................................. 158
automatic gearbox.............................. 158
Defroster.................................................... 91
Diesel....................................................... 144
DSTC, see also Stability system
symbol.................................................. 49
Diesel: engine preheater............................ 49
During a call, functions............................ 272
Clock, adjustment...................................... 80
Collision
crash mode........................................... 30
inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26
Colour code, paint................................... 212
Combined instrument panel...................... 47
Compass................................................... 74
calibration............................................. 74
setting the zone.................................... 74
Condensation in headlamps.................... 208
308
Coolant.................................................... 225
checking and topping up.................... 225
Diesel particle filter.................................. 144
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 224
Direction indicators.................................... 61
E
Disc text................................................... 263
ECC, electronic climate control................. 89
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 158
Economical driving.................................. 140
Display, messages..................................... 52
Display lighting.......................................... 57
ECO pressure.......................................... 196
table............................................ 196, 298
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 251, 255
Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 161
12 Alphabetical Index
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 13
Fluids and oils general............................. 222
Electrical socket
centre console...................................... 54
rear seat................................................ 54
EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 261
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 57
Electrical system...................................... 300
Equalizer.................................................. 255
Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 57
Emergency calls...................................... 267
Error messages in BLIS........................... 172
Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 116
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 197
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17
Frequency update, automatic.................. 260
External dimensions................................ 286
Front seats, heated.................................... 91
Extra mats................................................ 108
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13
Emergency puncture repair..................... 201
Emission control
fault indicator........................................ 49
Engine block heater................................. 152
fuel-driven............................................. 97
F
Engine compartment...............................
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
power steering fluid............................
Fan
A/C........................................................ 90
ECC...................................................... 93
220
225
222
227
Fast-wind................................................. 263
Engine oil......................................... 222, 290
adverse driving conditions.................. 290
capacities........................................... 290
filter..................................................... 222
oil grade.............................................. 290
oil pressure........................................... 50
Floor mats................................................ 108
Engine specifications............................... 289
Fluids, capacities..................................... 292
Entry, keyless............................................. 81
Fluids and oils.................................. 222, 292
First aid equipment.................................. 198
Flexifuel.................................................... 152
adaptation........................................... 153
Floor hatch............................................... 119
Fuel
CO2 emissions.................................... 295
12
consumption....................................... 295
fuel consumption, display..................... 62
fuel economy...................................... 196
fuel filter.............................................. 144
level indicator........................................ 49
parking heater....................................... 97
refuelling............................................. 142
Fuses.......................................................
box in the engine compartment..........
changing.............................................
general................................................
relay/fuse box in the passenger compartment.............................................
240
241
240
240
245
Fluids and oils, checks, engine compartment......................................................... 222
309
12 Alphabetical Index
G
Gearbox
manual................................................ 155
High-pressure headlamp washing............. 64
HomeLinkŸ
................................................ 83
Home safe lighting............................... 61, 76
setting................................................... 81
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 157
Interior rearview mirror............................... 74
automatic dimming............................... 74
Intermittent wiping..................................... 64
iPodŸ, connection................................... 252
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 36
Geartronic................................................ 156
General information on fuel..................... 142
12
Glovebox................................................. 113
locking................................................ 126
Gross vehicle weight............................... 287
GSI - Gear selector assistance........ 155, 162
H
Handbrake................................................. 71
Hazard warning flashers............................ 70
Headlamp pattern adjustment
Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 188
Headlamps................................................. 56
Head restraint.......................................... 116
Heating
front seats....................................... 91, 95
rearview and door mirrors.............. 91, 95
rear window.................................... 91, 95
310
I
IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information System........................................................... 267
J
Jack......................................................... 197
Ignition keys............................................. 151
IMEI number............................................ 272
Immobiliser...................................... 124, 151
K
Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26
Kerb weight.............................................. 287
Information display.................................... 52
Key
keyless lock and ignition system........ 128
remote control key.............................. 124
Information on fuel................................... 142
Infotainment system
menus................................................. 250
Inlaid mats............................................... 108
Instrument lighting..................................... 57
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 42
right-hand drive.................................... 44
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 109
Key blade......................................... 125, 129
active locks......................................... 127
Keyless drive.................................... 128, 154
starting the car.................................... 154
Keyless entry............................................. 81
Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 128
Keypad in the steering wheel...... 67, 69, 268
12 Alphabetical Index
Key positions........................................... 150
Kick-down
automatic gearbox.............................. 157
L
Lambda-sond.......................................... 143
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 210
Lighting
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 58
approach light, duration............... 76, 124
automatic lighting............................... 110
automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 56
bulbs, specifications........................... 300
cargo area........................................... 109
dipped beam........................................ 56
display lighting...................................... 57
front fog lamps..................................... 57
headlamp levelling................................ 56
home safe lighting.......................... 61, 76
in passenger compartment................. 109
lighting panel, passenger compartment 56
main/dipped beam......................... 56, 61
position/parking lamps......................... 56
reading lamps..................................... 109
rear fog lamp........................................ 57
Lighting, bulb replacement......................
bulb holder, rear.................................
cargo area...........................................
dipped beam......................................
direction indicators.............................
fog lamp..............................................
front....................................................
main beam..........................................
number plate lighting..........................
parking lamps.....................................
passenger compartment lighting in
cargo area...........................................
position lamps....................................
side marker lamps..............................
vanity mirror........................................
234
238
238
235
236
237
234
235
238
236
Lubricants................................................ 292
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 292
M
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 56
Main beam
flashing................................................. 61
Main beam "flash"..................................... 61
239
236
236
239
Maintenance............................................ 219
rustproofing........................................ 214
self-maintenance................................ 219
Loading
general................................................ 187
load capacity...................................... 187
load retaining eyelets.......................... 120
Manual gearbox....................................... 155
GSI - Gear selector assistance... 155, 162
towing and recovery........................... 174
Load retaining eyelets.............................. 120
Locking.................................................... 129
unlocking............................................ 132
Locking/unlocking................................... 132
inside.................................................. 132
outside................................................ 132
Locks
locking................................................ 132
12
Making calls..................................... 269, 277
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 156
Max. roof load ......................................... 287
Memory function in seats........................ 105
Menus
audio system...................................... 250
Menu structure.......................................... 80
media player....................................... 265
311
12 Alphabetical Index
phone, menu options.......................... 274
phone, overview................................. 273
12
O
Passenger compartment heater
fuel-driven............................................. 97
Messages in BLIS.................................... 172
Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 222, 290
Messages in the information display......... 52
Oil level low.............................................. 222
Meters in the combined instrument panel
fuel gauge.............................................
outside temperature gauge..................
speedometer.........................................
tachometer...........................................
trip meter..............................................
One-key dial............................................. 271
47
47
47
47
47
Misting
attending to the windows..................... 88
condensation in headlamps............... 208
rear window.......................................... 91
removing with defroster function.... 91, 94
timer function.................................. 91, 94
Mobile phone
connect............................................... 278
handsfree............................................ 276
register phone..................................... 276
Mounting points (child seat)...................... 39
N
News........................................................ 259
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13
Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 178
P
PACOS....................................................... 22
PACOS, switch.......................................... 22
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 212
damage and touch-up........................ 212
Parking assistance................................... 169
parking assistance sensors................ 170
Parking brake....................................... 50, 71
Parking heater
battery and fuel.....................................
general..................................................
parking on a hill....................................
symbols and display messages............
time setting...........................................
97
97
97
98
99
Passenger compartment filter................... 88
312
Personal preferences.................................
approach light, duration.......................
auto blower adjust................................
automatic locking.................................
doors unlock.........................................
home safe lighting................................
keyless entry.........................................
lock confirm. light.................................
recirculation timer.................................
unlock confirm. light.............................
80
81
80
81
81
81
81
81
80
81
Petrol grade............................................. 143
Phone
calling from the phone book...............
connect...............................................
controls...............................................
entering text........................................
handsfree............................................
incoming calls.....................................
making calls........................................
on/off..................................................
one-key dial........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
register phone.....................................
271
278
268
270
276
277
277
269
271
279
279
277
276
12 Alphabetical Index
259
258
257
257
260
Refrigerant............................................... 221
Radio text................................................ 260
Refusing a call......................................... 269
Rain sensor................................................ 65
REG - Regional radio programmes......... 260
Random, CD and audio files.................... 263
Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 240
RDS functions.......................................... 258
resetting.............................................. 261
Power steering fluid, checking and topping
up............................................................. 227
Remote control........................................ 124
replacing the battery........................... 131
Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 109
Power sunroof........................................... 78
Rear seat.................................................. 116
boarding............................................. 105
Remote control, HomeLinkŸ
programmable ..................................... 83
standby, standby mode...................... 269
traffic safety........................................ 268
Phone book
handling numbers............................... 270
Phone system.......................................... 267
Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 79
Polishing.................................................. 209
Power seat............................................... 104
Powershift gearbox.......................... 158, 174
Power windows......................................... 72
passenger seat..................................... 73
Programme type...................................... 260
PTY – Programme type........................... 260
Puncture, see Tyres......................... 197, 199
Putting calls on hold................................ 269
R
Radio
EON.................................................... 261
frequency update................................ 260
news...................................................
programme types...............................
radio settings......................................
radio stations......................................
REG....................................................
Rearview and door mirrors
automatic retracting/extending...... 76, 81
compass............................................... 74
door...................................................... 76
electrically retractable........................... 76
interior................................................... 74
Recirculation
A/C........................................................ 90
ECC...................................................... 94
Recommended child seats ....................... 31
Reduced guard
settings................................................. 81
Refuelling
fuel cap............................................... 142
fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 142
refuelling............................................. 142
Remote control key.................................
battery replacement............................
detachable key blade.........................
functions.............................................
12
151
131
125
124
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 302
Resetting the door mirrors......................... 76
Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 155
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 208
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 287
Rustproofing............................................ 214
313
12 Alphabetical Index
S
Safety
safety systems, table............................ 29
12
Soot filter........................................... 52, 145
Safety net................................................. 120
Soot filter full............................................ 145
Scan
CD and audio files.............................. 263
radio stations...................................... 258
Sound
audio settings............................. 252, 254
audio source....................................... 252
volume................................................ 252
Seatbelt
pregnancy............................................. 17
seatbelt guide....................................... 18
seatbelt tensioner................................. 18
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17
Seatbelts.................................................... 16
Seats
head restraints, rear............................
lowering the rear backrest..................
manual setting....................................
power seat..........................................
116
116
104
104
Securing loads ........................................ 120
Service programme................................. 218
Spare wheel............................................. 197
temporary spare......................... 195, 197
Spin control............................................. 167
Storage compartment.............................. 112
CD discs............................................. 114
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment......................................................... 112
Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 257
Streaming audio...................................... 254
Subwoofer............................................... 254
Sunroof...................................................... 78
opening and closing....................... 78, 79
pinch protection.................................... 79
sunscreen............................................. 79
ventilation position................................ 78
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 79
Stability and traction control system....... 167
Surround.......................................... 251, 255
Stains....................................................... 209
Start assistance....................................... 178
Symbols................................................... 168
indicator symbols........................... 49, 50
warning symbols................................... 48
Starting the engine.................................. 150
keyless drive............................... 128, 154
Symbols and display messages
parking heater....................................... 98
Standby, phone....................................... 269
Steering lock............................................ 150
Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24
Steering wheel
cruise control........................................ 67
keypad.................................... 67, 69, 268
steering wheel adjustment.................... 70
SIPS bags.................................................. 24
Stone chips and scratches...................... 212
SRS system
general.................................................. 20
Side airbags............................................... 24
SIM card.................................................. 267
314
SMS......................................................... 272
read..................................................... 272
write.................................................... 272
12 Alphabetical Index
T
Tailgate
driving with open tailgate................... 141
locking/unlocking........................ 124, 132
Tank volume............................................ 292
Technical data, engine............................. 289
Temperature
actual temperature............................... 89
passenger compartment, electronic climate control.......................................... 95
passenger compartment, manual climate control.......................................... 92
Testing the alarm system......................... 136
Timer
A/C........................................................ 91
ECC...................................................... 94
Tools........................................................ 197
Total airing function................................. 133
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 181
Towing..................................................... 174
towing eye.......................................... 176
Towing capacity....................................... 287
Towing equipment................................... 181
installation........................................... 183
removing............................................. 185
specifications...................................... 182
Towing eye.............................................. 176
TP – Traffic information............................ 259
Traffic information.................................... 259
Trailer....................................................... 179
cable................................................... 181
Trip computer............................................ 62
Tuning Radio............................................ 257
U
Unlocking......................................... 129, 132
settings................................................. 81
Upper mounting points, child seat............ 39
USB, connection...................................... 252
V
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 302
Ventilation.................................................. 88
Type designation..................................... 284
Volume
audio system...................................... 252
auto volume control............................ 255
media player....................................... 252
Tyres
direction of rotation............................ 195
driving characteristics......................... 192
general................................................ 192
maintenance....................................... 192
pressure...................................... 196, 298
puncture repair................................... 201
specifications...................................... 192
speed ratings...................................... 192
tread wear indicators.......................... 193
winter tyres......................................... 195
12
Vibration damper..................................... 181
W
Warning lamp
stability and traction control system. . 167
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19
Warning triangle....................................... 197
Washer fluid, filling................................... 225
315
12 Alphabetical Index
Washers
headlamps............................................ 64
rear window.......................................... 65
washer fluid, filling.............................. 225
windscreen........................................... 64
Waxing..................................................... 209
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 287
12
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
removal...............................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
199
200
199
194
194
197
Whiplash injury.......................................... 27
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 27
whiplash injury...................................... 27
Windscreen wipers.................................... 64
rain sensor............................................ 65
Winter tyres.............................................. 195
Wiper
rear window.......................................... 65
Wiper blades............................................ 228
cleaning.............................................. 228
316
replacing, rear window....................... 228
replacing, windscreen......................... 228
Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc51&OHMJTI
"51SJOUFEJO4XFEFO(zUFCPSH$PQZSJHIU©7PMWP$BS$PSQPSBUJPO
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement